Mercedes Benz 2005 E Class Wagon Owners Manual S211.boo

Mercedes-Benz-2005-E-Class-Wagon-Users-Manual-398588 mercedes-benz-2005-e-class-wagon-users-manual-398588

2015-09-07

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2005-E-Class-Wagon-Owners-Manual-763331 mercedes-benz-2005-e-class-wagon-owners-manual-763331 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 491 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Sommer\ Co rporate\ Media\ AG
Operator’s Manual
E-Class Wagon
Order No. 6515 1130 13 Part No. 211 584 66 96 USA Edition B, 2005
Ê5/tbÁ3Ë
2115846696
Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon
E320
E 320 4MATIC
E 500 4MATIC
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de-
sire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,
as well as your and your passengers' safe-
ty, we ask you to make a small investment
of time:
앫Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
앫Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are de-
signed to assist you with the operation
of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
cupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction.......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Door control panel................................ 30
Getting started................................... 31
Unlocking ............................................. 32
Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 32
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 33
Starter switch positions.................. 34
Adjusting .............................................. 38
Seats .............................................. 38
Steering wheel................................ 40
Mirrors............................................ 41
Driving.................................................. 44
Fastening the seat belts ................. 44
Starting the engine ......................... 47
Switching on headlamps................. 51
Turn signals .................................... 51
Windshield wipers........................... 52
Rear window wiper/washer ........... 54
Problems while driving.................... 55
Parking and locking .............................. 56
Parking brake ................................. 56
Switching off headlamps................. 57
Turning off engine........................... 57
Contents
Safety and Security........................... 61
Occupant safety................................... 62
Air bags .......................................... 63
Seat belts ....................................... 69
Children in the vehicle.................... 73
Blocking of rear door
window operation........................... 84
Panic alarm .......................................... 86
Activating ....................................... 86
Deactivating ................................... 86
Driving safety systems......................... 87
ABS ................................................ 87
BAS ................................................ 89
ESP................................................. 89
SBC brake system .......................... 92
Four wheel electronic traction
system (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... 95
Anti-theft systems................................ 97
Immobilizer..................................... 97
Anti-theft alarm system .................. 98
Tow-away alarm ............................. 99
Controls in detail............................. 101
Locking and unlocking ....................... 102
SmartKey ..................................... 102
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 107
Opening the doors from the inside 114
Opening the tailgate..................... 115
Closing the tailgate ...................... 117
Automatic central locking ............ 122
Locking and unlocking from the
inside ........................................... 122
Seats ................................................. 124
Easy-entry/exit feature ............... 124
Removing and installing front
seat head restraints ..................... 126
Rear seat head restraints ............. 127
Drive-Dynamic seat* with
multicontour features................... 130
Seat heating*............................... 132
Seat ventilation* .......................... 133
Folding bench seat in cargo
compartment ............................... 134
Memory function ............................... 138
Storing positions in memory ........ 139
Recalling positions from memory. 139
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 140
Lighting ............................................. 141
Exterior lamp switch .................... 141
Combination switch ..................... 145
Hazard warning flasher ................ 146
Interior lighting ............................ 147
Door entry lamps ......................... 149
Interior lighting in the rear ........... 149
Instrument cluster ............................. 150
Instrument cluster illumination .... 150
Coolant temperature indicator..... 151
Trip odometer .............................. 151
Tachometer.................................. 152
Outside temperature indicator ..... 152
Contents
Control system .................................. 153
Multifunction display.................... 153
Multifunction steering wheel........ 154
Menus .......................................... 156
Standard display menu ................ 158
AUDIO menu ................................ 158
NAV* menu .................................. 160
Distronic* menu........................... 160
Vehicle status message
memory menu.............................. 161
Settings menu.............................. 162
Trip computer menu..................... 178
TEL menu* ................................... 179
Automatic transmission..................... 183
One-touch gearshifting................. 185
Gear ranges ................................. 186
Gear selector lever position ......... 187
Automatic shift program .............. 188
Driving tips................................... 189
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 190
Good visibility ..................................... 191
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 191
Rear view mirror ........................... 191
Sun visors ..................................... 193
Roller sunblind* in the rear doors. 194
Rear window defroster.................. 195
Dual-zone automatic climate control.. 196
Deactivating the dual-zone
automatic climate control system. 201
Setting the temperature................ 201
Adjusting air distribution............... 201
Adjusting air volume ..................... 202
Defrosting ..................................... 203
Air recirculation mode .................. 204
Air conditioning............................. 206
Residual heat and ventilation*...... 207
4-zone automatic climate control*..... 208
Deactivating the 4-zone
automatic climate control system 213
Setting the temperature ............... 214
Adjusting air distribution .............. 214
Adjusting air volume ..................... 215
Defrosting..................................... 215
Maximum cooling MAX COOL....... 216
Air recirculation mode .................. 216
Air conditioning ............................ 218
Residual heat and ventilation....... 219
Rear air conditioning..................... 219
Power windows .................................. 221
Opening and closing the windows 221
Synchronizing power windows...... 223
Summer opening feature .............. 223
Convenience closing feature......... 224
Power tilt/ sliding sunroof*................ 225
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 225
Synchronizing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof ....................... 227
Contents
Driving systems ................................. 228
Cruise control............................... 228
Distronic*..................................... 232
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)*......... 244
Loading .............................................. 247
Split rear bench seat .................... 247
Expanding the cargo
compartment................................ 249
Loading instructions..................... 250
Cargo tie-down rings .................... 251
Cargo management system*
(Canada only) ............................... 252
Storage box in cargo
compartment (Canada only)......... 255
Twin roller blind............................ 256
Useful features .................................. 259
Storage compartments................. 259
Cup holders.................................. 262
Ashtrays ....................................... 265
Cigarette lighter ........................... 266
12-V socket*................................ 266
Heated steering wheel* ............... 267
Floormats ..................................... 268
Telephone*................................... 268
Tele Aid* ...................................... 269
Garage door opener ..................... 277
Operation ......................................... 283
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 284
Driving instructions............................ 285
Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 285
Drinking and driving ..................... 285
Pedals .......................................... 285
Power assistance ......................... 286
Brakes .......................................... 286
Driving off .................................... 288
Parking......................................... 288
Tires ............................................. 288
Hydroplaning................................ 289
Tire traction.................................. 290
Tire speed rating .......................... 290
Winter driving instructions ........... 291
Standing water............................. 292
Passenger compartment .............. 293
Driving abroad.............................. 293
Control and operation of radio
transmitter ................................... 293
Catalytic converter....................... 294
Emission control .......................... 294
Coolant temperature .................... 295
At the gas station .............................. 296
Refueling...................................... 296
Check regularly and before a
long trip ....................................... 297
Engine compartment ......................... 299
Hood ............................................ 299
Engine oil ..................................... 300
Transmission fluid level................ 303
Coolant level ................................ 303
Battery ......................................... 305
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*......... 306
Tires and wheels................................ 307
Important guidelines .................... 307
Tire care and maintenance........... 308
Direction of rotation..................... 310
Loading the vehicle ...................... 310
Recommended tire inflation
pressure....................................... 316
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 318
Tire labeling ................................. 323
Load identification ....................... 327
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................. 327
Maximum tire load ....................... 329
Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 329
Contents
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 330
Tire ply material ........................... 332
Tire and loading terminology........ 332
Rotating tires ............................... 335
Winter driving .................................... 337
Winter tires .................................. 337
Block heater* (Canada only) ........ 338
Snow chains................................. 338
Maintenance...................................... 339
Clearing the maintenance
service indicator........................... 340
Maintenance service term
exceeded ..................................... 340
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator........................... 341
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator........................... 341
Setting the date for special
works ........................................... 342
Calling up the maintenance
service data information .............. 343
Vehicle care....................................... 344
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 344
Practical hints .................................. 351
What to do if … ................................... 352
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 352
Lamp in center console................. 360
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display..................... 362
Where will I find ...? ............................ 401
First aid kit.................................... 401
Vehicle tool kit, jack and
spare wheel .................................. 401
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 404
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 404
Locking the vehicle ....................... 405
Fuel filler flap emergency release . 405
Manually unlocking the
gear selector lever ........................ 405
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 407
Tilt/sliding sunroof*..................... 407
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 408
SmartKey ...................................... 408
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 409
Replacing bulbs .................................. 410
Bulbs............................................. 410
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 413
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 415
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 416
Removing wiper blades................. 416
Installing wiper blades .................. 417
Flat tire............................................... 418
Preparing the vehicle .................... 418
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 419
Batteries............................................. 424
Disconnecting the battery ............ 426
Removing the battery ................... 426
Charging and reinstalling the
battery .......................................... 427
Reconnecting the battery ............. 427
Jump starting...................................... 428
Towing the vehicle.............................. 430
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 433
Fuses.................................................. 434
Aids for replacing fuses ................ 434
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ................................ 435
Fuse box in cargo compartment ... 435
Contents
Technical data.................................. 437
Parts service ...................................... 438
Warranty coverage............................. 439
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet...................... 439
Identification labels............................ 440
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 441
E 320/E 500 ............................... 441
Engine................................................ 442
Rims and tires.................................... 443
Same size tires............................. 444
Mixed size tires ............................ 445
Minispare wheel ........................... 446
Electrical system................................ 447
Main dimensions................................ 448
Weights.............................................. 449
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 450
Capacities .................................... 450
Engine oils.................................... 453
Engine oil additives ...................... 453
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 453
Brake fluid.................................... 453
Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 454
Gasoline additives ........................ 454
Fuel requirements ........................ 455
Coolants....................................... 455
Windshield and headlamp washer
system ......................................... 458
Technical terms............................... 459
Index................................................. 465
9
Product information
왔
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or authori-
zation by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and acces-
sories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive informa-
tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
cations, and where proper installation will
be performed.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-
ure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-
dures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.The Opera-
tor’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are
important documents and should be kept
with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫New Car Limited Warranty
앫Emission System Warranty
앫Emission Performance Warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-
fect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have direct-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center, One
Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
NJ 07645-0350.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser-
vice. The service advisor will record each
service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
앫service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫gasoline may have a considerably low-
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
14
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. For easy
access, each section has its own reference
color:
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehi-
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
cle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehi-
cle can be found in this section.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫this Operator’s Manual
앫the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
왔Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
* Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
왘This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
-> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
Warning! G
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
16
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫the safety precautions in this manual
앫the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫traffic rules and regulations
앫motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
dards
Warning! G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other sys-
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri-
ously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
Warning! G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance,
or you suspect that damage to your vehicle
has occurred, you should turn on your haz-
ard warning flashers, carefully slow down,
and drive with caution to an area which is a
safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires /wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa-
cility for further inspection or repairs.
Warning! G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
20
21
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
22
At a glance
Cockpit
23
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page
1Parking brake pedal 49, 56
2Hood lock release 299
3Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
41
Heated steering wheel* 267
4Parking brake release 49
5Combination switch
앫Turn signals 51
앫Windshield wipers 52
앫High beam 51
6Door control panel 30
7Exterior lamp switch 141
Item Page
8Headlamp washer button* 191
9Cruise control lever
앫Cruise control 236
앫Distronic* 232
aInstrument cluster 24,
150
bMultifunction steering
wheel
26,
154
cHorn
dLever for voice control sys-
tem*, see separate
operating instructions
Item Page
eStarter switch 34
fOverhead control panel 29
gMobile phone/Glasses box 259
hGlove box lid release, glove
box lock
259
jGlove box 259
kCenter console 27
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
1LLeft turn signal indica-
tor lamp
2vABS/ ESP warning
lamp
353
3Speedometer
4Multifunction display 153
5lDistance warning
lamp
Vehicles without Distronic*:
Warning lamp without func-
tion. It illuminates when the
ignition is on. It should go out
when the engine is running.
357
6KRight turn signal indi-
cator lamp
7Coolant temperature dis-
play with:
•Coolant temperature
warning lamp
356
Item Page
8Tachometer with:
1Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
359
-Antilock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) malfunc-
tion indicator lamp
352
<Seat belt telltale 357
BLow beam headlamp
indicator
51
AHigh beam headlamp
indicator
145
9Main odometer with:
앫Selector lever position 47
앫Program mode 188
aClock with: 167
;Brake warning lamp,
USA only
354
3Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
354
Item Page
?Engine malfunction in-
dicator lamp, USA
only
355
±Engine malfunction in-
dicator lamp, Canada
only
355
HTire pressure warning
lamp*
358
390
bFuel display with:
AFuel reserve warning
lamp
357
cReset button for:
앫Resetting trip odometer 151
앫Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
150
앫Confirming new time set-
tings
167
26
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page
1Multifunction display in
speedometer
153
Operating control sys-
tem
154
2Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
æup/to increase
çdown/to decrease
3Telephone*:
Press button
sto take a call
to dial a call
tto end a call
to reject an incom-
ing call
Item Page
4Menu systems:
Press button
èfor next system
ÿfor previous system
5Moving within a menu:
Press button
jfor next display
kfor previous display
27
At a glance
Center console
왔Center console
Upper part Item Page
1Dual-zone automatic
climate control
4-zone automatic climate
control*
196
208
2COMAND system, see sep-
arate operating instruc-
tions
3Seat heating*, front pas-
senger side
Seat ventilation*, front
passenger side
132
133
4Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) control switch
91
5Central locking/unlocking
switch
123
6Opening/closing button
for storage tray or CD
changer*, see separate op-
erating instructions
260
7Rear seat head restraints
switch, folding down
127
Item Page
8Rear window wiper 54
9Seat heating*, driver’s side
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
132
133
aHazard warning flasher
switch
146
bFront passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
80
28
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page
1Ashtray 265
2KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
36
3Selector lever for automat-
ic transmission
47,
183
4Adaptive damping system
(ADS)* switch
244
Item Page
5Vehicle level control
switch*
245
6Thumbwheel for setting
distance for Distronic*
239
7Distance warning func-
tion* on/off switch
240
8Program mode selector for
automatic transmission
188
29
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔Overhead control panel
Item Page
1Rear interior lighting
on/off
149
2Automatic interior lighting 147
3Front interior lighting
on/off
147
4Temperature sensor
5Right reading lamp on/off 148
6Tilt/sliding sunroof* 225
Item Page
7Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
269
8Rear view mirror 191
9Reading lamps 147
aGarage door opener 277
bTow-away alarm button 99
cAmbient lighting 173
dInterior lighting
eLeft reading lamp on/off 148
30
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1Door handle 114
2Seat adjustment 39
3Memory function (for stor-
ing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel set-
tings)
138
4Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
42
5Switches for opening/
closing front and rear side
windows, rear window
override switch
221
6Remote tailgate release
switch, Tailgate opening
system*
122
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
32
Getting started
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic
functions.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
Unlocking
Unlocking with the SmartKey
SmartKey
1‹Lock button
2ŠUnlock button for tailgate*
3ŒUnlock button
4ÂPanic button (컄page 86)
왘Press unlock button Œ on the
SmartKey.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 104).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
33
Getting started
Unlocking
왘Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄page 102).
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
With KEYLESS-GO your can open your
vehicle without using the buttons on the
SmartKey.
왘Pull the outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 110).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
왘Get in the vehicle.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄page 107).
i
The SBC brake system is activated.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approximately
3 feet (1 meter) away from the door.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
The SBC brake system is activated.
34
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions SmartKey
Starter switch
0For removing SmartKey
1Power supply to some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment
2Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (expect low beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indica-
tor lamps unless activated) in the
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp
in the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on,
have it checked and replaced if neces-
sary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄page 352).
3Starting position
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
35
Getting started
Unlocking
For information on starting the engine
using the SmartKey, see “Starting the en-
gine” (컄page 47).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton on the gear selector lever corresponds
to turning the SmartKey to the various
starter switch positions.
If you firmly depress the brake pedal dur-
ing pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the engine starts automatically.
i
When you switch on the ignition, the in-
dicator and warning lamps (expect low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster come
on. This indicates that the respective
systems are operational. The indicator
and warning lamps (expect low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn sig-
nal indicator lamps if activated) should
go out when the engine is running.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the starter battery may
not be sufficiently charged.
왘Check the battery and charge it
if necessary (컄page 408).
왘Get a jump start (컄page 428).
To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge or a completely discharged bat-
tery, always remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch when the engine is
not in operation.
i
The function of the SmartKey overrules
the KEYLESS-GO function.
36
Getting started
Unlocking
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1USA only
2Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button, the vehicle's on-board elec-
tronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey
removed).
Position 1
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton once.
This supplies power to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
Ignition (or position 2)
왘Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All lamps in the instrument
cluster (expect low beam headlamp in-
dicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indica-
tor lamps unless activated) come on. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched
on, have it checked and replaced if nec-
essary. If a lamp in the instrument clus-
ter remains on after starting the engine
or comes on while driving, see “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄page 352).
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫once again, the ignition (position 2)
is switched on.
앫twice, the power supply is again
switched off.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power sup-
ply is again switched off.
37
Getting started
Unlocking
For information on starting the engine us-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄page 48).
i
When you switch on the ignition, the in-
dicator and warning lamps (expect low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster come
on. This indicates that the respective
systems are operational. The indicator
and warning lamps (expect low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn sig-
nal indicator lamps if activated) should
go out when the engine is running.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Seats
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-
tening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄page 44).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being ad-
justed.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start-
er switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats. Re-
gardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄page 73).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
39
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the front doors.
1Head restraint height
2Seat height
3Seat cushion tilt
4Seat fore and aft adjustment
5Backrest tilt
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
or
왘Open the respective door.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4.
Adjust a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
Seat cushion tilt
왘Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Backrest tilt
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 5 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 2.
i
When moving the seat, be sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind
the seats. Otherwise you could damage
the seats.
The memory function (컄page 138) lets
you store the setting for the seat posi-
tion together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
40
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height
왘Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 1.
Head restraint tilt
Manually adjust the angle of the head re-
straint.
왘Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.
For more information on seats, see the
“Controls in detail” section (컄page 124).
Steering wheel
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as possi-
ble.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock your vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start-
er switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the steering column (lower left).
1Adjusting steering column, in or out
2Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
or
왘Open the driver’s door.
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunc-
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru-
ment cluster are clearly visible.
For more information, see “Heated steer-
ing wheel*”(컄page 267).
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
i
The memory function (컄page 138) lets
you store the setting for the seat posi-
tion together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
ter.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
Interior rear view mirror
왘Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
ror” (컄page 191).
Exterior rear view mirror
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
1Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
ror button
2Adjustment button
3Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press button 3 for the driver’s side ex-
terior rear view mirror or button 1 for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the setting
desired.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
For more information, see “Activating exte-
rior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄page 192).
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
ror” (컄page 191).
!
If an exterior rear view mirror was forc-
ibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
the front), reposition it by applying firm
pressure until it snaps into place. The
mirror housing is now properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
i
The memory function (컄page 138) lets
you store the setting for the seat posi-
tion together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
At low ambient temperatures, the exte-
rior rear view mirrors will be heated au-
tomatically.
44
Getting started
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot-
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear-
ance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄page 69).
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄page 73).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
45
Getting started
Driving
1Retractor
2Latch plate
3Buckle
4Release button
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄page 66) and (컄page 69).
46
Getting started
Driving
왘Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
it clicks.
왘If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Belt outlet height adjustment
1Release button
왘Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
Proper use of seat belts
앫Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫Do not fasten a seat belt around a
person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
앫Check your seat belt periodically
during travel to make sure that it is
properly positioned.
앫Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
ness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
47
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position with gear selector lever
lock
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄page 183).
Starting with the SmartKey
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off en-
gine” (컄page 57).
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Do not depress the accelerator.
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄page 34).
왘Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock is released.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open.
i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immedi-
ately. The engine then starts automati-
cally.
48
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄page 59).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1USA only
2Canada only
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress ac-
celerator.
The selector lever lock is released.
왘Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
The engine starts automatically if the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
vehicle.
Warning! G
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
dentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.
49
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detec-
tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
왘Repeat the starting procedure
(컄page 47). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘Get a jump start (컄page 428).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
1Parking brake pedal
2Release handle
왘Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 2.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
50
Getting started
Driving
Driving
왘Depress the brake pedal.
왘Move selector lever to position Dor R.
왘Release the brake pedal.
왘Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-
ic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
After a cold start the automatic transmis-
sion engages at a higher revolution. This al-
lows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
For more information on driving, see “Driv-
ing instructions” (컄page 285).
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
!
If you hear a warning signal and a mes-
sage appears in the multifunction dis-
play when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
51
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Exterior lamp switch
1Off
2Low beam headlamps on
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamp indicator
lamp B in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄page 141).
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1High beam
2High beam flasher
왘Turn combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄page 24).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄page 141).
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1Turn signal, right
2Turn signal, left
왘Press combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes.
52
Getting started
Driving
The combination switch resets automati-
cally after major steering wheel move-
ments.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1Single wipe
2Switching on windshield wipers
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Switching on windshield wipers
왘Turn the combination switch to the de-
sired position depending on the inten-
sity of the rain.
0Windshield wipers off
IIntermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
i
To signal minor directional changes
such as changing lanes, press combi-
nation switch only to point of resis-
tance and release. The corresponding
turn signals will flash three times.
i
Intermittent wiping interval is depen-
dent on wetness of windshield. After
the initial wipe, pauses between wipes
are automatically controlled by the rain
sensor.
53
Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping
왘Turn the combination switch to
position I.
Single wipe
왘Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘Push switch in the direction of
arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄page 306).
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak-
en to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result.
The combination switch should not be
left in intermittent setting as the wipers
will wipe the windshield once every
time the engine is started. Dust that ac-
cumulates on the windshield might
scratch the glass and/or damage the
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a
dry windshield.
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
!
If anything blocks the windshield wip-
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
앫For safety reasons,
앫turn off the engine by turning
the SmartKey to position 0 and
withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch
or
앫turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
54
Getting started
Driving
Rear window wiper/washer
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1Intermittent wipe
2Indicator lamp
3Rear window washer system
Activating intermittent wipe
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34)
왘Press upper section 1 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Deactivating intermittent wipe
왘Press upper section 1 of the switch
again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Wiping with window washer fluid
왘Press and hold lower half 3 of the
switch.
The rear window is wiped for a further
five seconds after the switch is re-
leased.
앫Remove blockage.
앫Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
앫have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center
55
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
앫Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘Give very little gas.
왘Have the problem repaired by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄page 303).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫major assemblies
앫fuel system
앫engine mount:
왘Start the engine in the usual manner.
56
Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Parking brake
1Parking brake pedal
2Release handle
왘Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.
When the engine is running, the warn-
ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
move the gear selector lever from
position P, either of which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
57
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄page 51).
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄page 141).
Turning off engine
왘Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄page 34) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
왘Press the seat belt release button
(컄page 45).
Allow the retractor to completely re-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb. i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels to-
wards the road curb.
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
컄컄
58
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄page 32).
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 104).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄page 102).
i
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds
and the message
Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
컄컄
59
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘Place the gear selector lever in P.
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton to shut off the engine.
With the driver's door closed, the start-
er switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄page 34).
왘Press the seat belt release button
(컄page 45).
Allow the retractor to completely re-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
!
If you hear a warning signal, you have
either
앫forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s
exterior lamps before opening the
driver’s door,
or
앫tried to turn off the engine while the
gear selector lever is not in P.
Turn off the lights or place the gear se-
lector lever in P.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing. 컄컄
60
Getting started
Parking and locking
1Lock button on the door handle
왘After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the door handle or on the
tailgate.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 110).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄page 107).
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
컄컄
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
앫Seat belts (컄page 69)
앫Child restraints (컄page 73)
앫Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) (컄page 83)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
앫Air bags (컄page 63)
앫Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for
seat belts (컄page 72)
Air bag system components with
앫75 indicator lamp
(컄page 80)
앫Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄page 76)
As independent systems, their protective
functions work in conjunction with each
other.
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The 1indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a
few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1indicator lamp:
앫fails to go out after approximately
four seconds after the engine was
started
앫does not come on at all
앫comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 73).
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call our Customer Assistance Cen-
ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Warning! G
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
impact air bags and head protection window
curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protec-
tion window curtain air bags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
porary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
erly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured by an air bag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
lems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms
inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front air bag inflates.
앫Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
앫Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the air bag be triggered. Always sit near-
ly upright, properly use the seat belts
and use an appropriately sized infant or
toddler restraint or booster seat recom-
mended for the size and weight of the
child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other occu-
pants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety in-
formation. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact air bags there is a
possibility for a side impact air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a side impact air bag which needs to de-
ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its
job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or boost-
er seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-
ed side impact air bags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Air bags are designed to deploy only in
certain frontal impacts (front air bags),
side impacts (side impact and head
protection window curtain air bags)
which exceed preset thresholds and in
certain rollovers (head protection win-
dow curtain air bags). Only during
these events will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should al-
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for air bags to provide
their supplemental protection.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and air
bag
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, air bags will not be de-
ployed. The driver and passenger will
then be protected to the extent possi-
ble by a properly fastened seat belt. A
properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the pres-
ence of the air bags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of
your passengers that you replace de-
ployed air bags and repair any malfunc-
tioning air bags to make sure that the
vehicle will continue to provide supple-
mental crash protection for occupants.
Warning! G
앫Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Air bags and emergency tensioning de-
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide ade-
quate protection.
앫No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front air bag cov-
er, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between air bags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
앫Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projec-
tiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain air bag is deployed.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Front air bags
1Driver’s air bag
2Passenger air bag
Driver and front passenger air bags are de-
ployed:
앫in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact air
bags
앫In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other more significant injuries resulting
from air bag deployment.
Warning! G
Only use seat covers which have been test-
ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the front side impact air bags. Contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for avail-
ability.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if:
앫the system, based on OCS weight sen-
sor readings, senses that the front pas-
senger seat is occupied
앫the 75 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit (컄page 80)
앫the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
ment threshold
Side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags
1Side impact air bags
2Window curtain air bag
The side impact air bags and window
curtain air bags are deployed:
앫on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫independently of the front air bags
i
The front air bags in this vehicle have
been designed to inflate in two stages.
This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation that are based on the
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the front passenger side, the front
air bag deployment is additionally influ-
enced by the passenger’s weight cate-
gory as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄page 76).
The lighter the front passenger side oc-
cupant, the higher the vehicle deceler-
ation rate required for the second
stage inflation of the air bag.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed:
앫in certain vehicle rollovers
The side impact air bags and window cur-
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment threshold.
Seat belts
When the engine is started the seat belt
telltale < illuminates for approximately
six seconds. A warning chime sounds to
remind you to fasten your seat belt.
If after these six seconds, the driver’s or
the front passenger’s seat belt (with the
front passenger seat occupied) are not fas-
tened with all doors closed,
앫and the vehicle speed does not exceed
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt tell-
tale < remains illuminated for as
long as either the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s seat belt are not fastened.
앫and the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h), the seat belt telltale <
starts flashing and a warning chime
sounds with increasing intensity until
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt are fastened, or for a maxi-
mum of 60 seconds from the time the
vehicle speed exceeded 15 mph
(25 km/h) if either the driver’s or front
passenger’s seat belt remains unfas-
tened.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the seat belt telltale <
stops flashing and the warning chime
stops sounding. The seat belt
telltale < then continues to be illu-
minated for as long as either the driv-
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt are
not fastened.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat oc-
cupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄page 357).
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄page 44).
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 73).
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
ries in case of an accident.
앫Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas-
senger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain
air bags for side windows), ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device), and
front seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted oc-
cupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETD) and side (side impact and win-
dow curtain air bags and ETD) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (win-
dow curtain air bags and ETD).
앫Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would in-
crease the chance of head and neck in-
juries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal or-
gans such as your liver or spleen. 컄컄
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
sioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
lowing cases:
앫in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing a preset severity level
앫in certain vehicle rollovers
앫if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1indicator lamp
앫Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another per-
son or other objects.
앫Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in boost-
er seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
i
The ETDs for the front seats will only
activate if the front seat belts are fas-
tened (latch plate properly inserted
into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
activate with or without the respective
seat belts fastened.
컄컄
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-
es remove slack from the belts. Belt force
limiters reduce the force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
앫Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual man-
ner.
Warning! G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tension-
ing device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Information on child seats with mount-
ing fittings for tether anchorages
(컄page 82).
For information on LATCH-type child
seat mounts (컄page 83).
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the Dis-
trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
top tether anchorage point and a child
restraint lower anchorage system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards 213 and 210.2.
Warning! G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with this
standard can be found on the instruc-
tion label on the restraint and in the
instruction manual provided with the
restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and
to infant or child restraints.
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
portant information when circumstances re-
quire you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropri-
ate child restraint on the front passen-
ger seat.
앫A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be serious-
ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
senger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circum-
stances, even with the air bag technolo-
gy installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
앫If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
cause circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the
75 indicator lamp is illuminat-
ed, indicating that the front passenger
air bag is deactivated. Should the light
not illuminate or go out while the re-
straint is installed, please check installa-
tion. Periodically check the indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
lamp is illuminated. If the
75 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the sys-
tem has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and se-
cure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄page 78).
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classi-
fied occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occu-
pant's weight is transferred to another
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
Warning! G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
ly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
hicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
The system does not deactivate the
front passenger side impact air bag,
the window curtain air bag and the
emergency tensioning device.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-
pear to increase or decrease due to
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pres-
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure that the seat has clearance in all di-
rections at all times.
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the 75 indicator
lamp as an indication of whether or not the
front passenger is properly positioned.
i
If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in
any way, take the vehicle to your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp illumi-
nates when an adult or someone larger than
a small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the light
goes out, or check whether objects are
caught under or around the seat.
More information about air bag display mes-
sages (컄page 369).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child re-
straint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child re-
straint, the 75 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and re-
main illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat is classified as being empty, the
75 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain illu-
minated, indicating that the front passenger
front air bag is deactivated. 컄컄
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 75 indicator lamp will illumi-
nate for approximately six seconds when
the engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
75 indicator lamp illuminated, the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
With the 75 indicator lamp out,
the front passenger front air bag is activat-
ed.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
75 indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately six seconds when the en-
gine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is acti-
vated.
If the 75 indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 75 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact air
bags.
If the front passenger air bag is deployed,
the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
앫the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫front passenger's weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS).
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
컄컄
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
portant information when circumstances re-
quire you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropri-
ate child restraint on the front passen-
ger seat.
앫A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be serious-
ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
senger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circum-
stances, even with the air bag technolo-
gy installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
앫If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
cause circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the
75 indicator lamp is illuminat-
ed, indicating that the front passenger
air bag is deactivated. Should the light
not illuminate or go out while the re-
straint is installed, please check installa-
tion. Periodically check the indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
lamp is illuminated. If the
75 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the sys-
tem has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and se-
cure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
air bag may or may not be activated
(컄page 78).
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 75 indicator lamp is located
in the center console.
1Indicator lamp
The 75 indicator lamp 1 will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0.
i
Deployment of the driver front air bag
does not mean that the front passenger
front air bag also should have de-
ployed.
The Occupant Classification System
(컄page 76) may have determined:
앫that the seat was empty or occu-
pied by the weight up to or le ss than
that of a typical 12-month-old child
seated in a standard child restraint
- both instances where the system
suppresses deployment of the pas-
senger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was
of sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag.
앫that the seat was occupied by a
small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult) or a child
weighing more than the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a stan-
dard child restraint - instances
where the system may suppress de-
ployment of the passenger front air
bag even though the impact met
the criteria and was of sufficient se-
verity to deploy the driver front air
bag.
Warning! G
If the 1indicator lamp and the
75 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
airbag system and OCS:
앫Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
into the ruffled storage bag on the back
of the front passenger seat. Otherwise,
the OCS may not be able to properly ap-
proximate the occupant weight
category.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-
tem
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 75 indicator lamp 1
located in the center console illuminates. If
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
front passenger seat and the system sens-
es the occupant as being an adult, the
75 indicator lamp will illuminate
and go out after approximately six sec-
onds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 75 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 369).
앫Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
앫Do not stuff objects such as books be-
tween the middle console and the front
passenger seat.
앫Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
self from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp should not illuminate,
the system is not functioning. You must see
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
Warning! G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
cation System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protec-
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
Prior to installing a tether strap, note the
following steps:
왘Roll up retractable luggage cover and
partition net.
왘Remove storage box (if so equipped)
(컄page 256).
If the storage box is not removed:
앫the top tether anchorage ring located
on the floor (컄page 83) for use with a
child restraint in the rear center seat
position cannot be accessed.
앫the hook of the top tether strap when
attached to the anchorage ring on an
outer rear seat backrest may push
against the storage box and prevent
the backrest from properly locking into
position.
왘If you place a child seat in the left or
center rear seat position, remove twin
roller blind (컄page 258) and return
seat to its original position.
왘If you place a child seat in the right rear
seat position, the twin roller blind can
remain installed if so desired.
왘Fold the rear backrest slightly forward
(컄page 247).
왘Guide top tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back.
Head restraints must be installed (if re-
movable) and positioned such that the
top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of
the seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not twist-
ed.
왘Fold the rear backrest back until it
locks in place (컄page 248).
!
Do not reinstall twin roller blind with a
child seat and top tether installed in the
left and center rear seat position.
i
With a child seat and top tether in-
stalled in the right rear seat position
and twin roller blind installed, make
sure the top tether strap is positioned
between seat backrest and twin roller
blind.
Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
sengers, or the extended cargo compart-
ment is not in use. Check for secure locking
by pushing and pulling on the backrest.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Anchorage rings 1 are located on the
back side of the outer rear backrests and
on the floor behind the rear center seat.
1Anchorage ring
2Hook
왘Fold up anchorage ring 1.
왘Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
of the tether strap, to anchorage
ring 1.
1Anchorage ring
2Hook
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Secure the child restraint and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Child seat anchors - LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a LATCH child
seat with the matching mounting fittings.
The anchors are located behind an uphol-
stery blend.
1Indicates the position of the anchors
2Anchors
i
For safety, make sure the hook has
attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated below.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Blocking of rear door window operation
1Override switch
2Indicator lamp
왘Press override switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear
door windows can no longer be operat-
ed using the switches located in the
rear doors.
!
Make sure the seat belt for the center
seat can operate freely with a child
seat installed.
i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system (컄page 73).
Install child seat according to the man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
Warning! G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
ly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
placed.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
!
Operation of the rear door windows
with the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door is still
possible.
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(컄page 221).
Warning! G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
86
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
1Â button
Activating
왘Press and hold button 1 for at least
one second.
Deactivating
왘Press button 1 again.
or
왘Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control)
앫4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic
Traction System)
ABS
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen-
dent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is run-
ning.
i
In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, SBC and 4MATIC is only achieved
with winter tires (M+ S tires), or snow
chains as required.
Warning! G
The following factors increase the risk of ac-
cidents:
앫Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC cannot
reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
Warning! G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
88
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster dial flashes. Because of the
SBC brake system, you will not feel any
pulsation in the brake pedal.
왘Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road condi-
tions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 353).
Warning! G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the brak-
ing distance.
Warning! G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
89
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing the braking distance.
왘Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
operational as soon as the engine is run-
ning and monitors the vehicle's traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slip-
pery road surfaces. The ESP also stabilizes
the vehicle during braking maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the in-
strument cluster flashes when the ESP is
engaged.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
Warning! G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
Warning! G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ-
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
90
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 353).
Warning! G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows:
앫While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor.
앫Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Warning! G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
!
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄page 443).
!
Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine and ignition must be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
when:
앫the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
For information on vehicles with
4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic
traction system (4MATIC) with the
ESP” (컄page 95).
91
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
such as:
앫starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
앫in sand or gravel
When you switch off the ESP
앫the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
앫the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel
앫the ESP continues to operate when you
are braking
앫you cannot activate Distronic*
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1ESP off/on switch
왘Press ESP switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP is deactivated.
Warning! G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
maneuvers.
!
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
i
When the ESP is switched off and one
or more drive wheels are spinning, the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes. However, the
ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle.
92
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching on the ESP
왘Press ESP switch 1.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP switched on.
SBC brake system
The SBC brake system combines a hydrau-
lic brake circuit with electronically con-
trolled brake servo assistance. You have
increased braking safety and improved
braking comfort.
Warning! G
When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
Warning! G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄page 354). Also read and ob-
serve the messages in the instrument clus-
ter display (컄page 362).
93
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The SBC brake system is automatically
activated when you:
앫unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO*
앫open the driver’s or passenger door
앫turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1
앫in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
the start/stop button on gear selector
lever once
앫depress the brake pedal
앫release the parking brake
Warning! G
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake sys-
tem operation and switch it into its emer-
gency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄page 354) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄page 362) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
press the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may
only be applied to the front wheels. Stop-
ping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir-
cumstances do not permit the use of the
recommended towing methods and the ve-
hicle requires towing with all four wheels on
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
more information, refer to “Towing the vehi-
cle” (컄page 430).
94
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The SBC brake servo assistance switches
off automatically
앫approximately two minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey
앫approximately two minutes after you
pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button to turn off the engine or power
supply and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter
switch is set to position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
앫approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside
i
If the SBC brake system is activated as
the brake pedal is first depressed, you
may feel a reduced pedal resistance
and longer pedal travel than normal.
When releasing the pedal, you may also
feel the brake pedal pulsate and you
may hear a sound which is caused by
the activation of the SBC brake system
pump. This is normal and not an indica-
tion of a malfunction. Pedal travel re-
turns to normal when you release the
brake pedal and the sound soon ceas-
es.
If you experience the above while driv-
ing and the red brake warning lamp
(컄page 354) illuminates and/or warn-
ing messages appear in the instrument
cluster (컄page 362), the brake system
is malfunctioning. Follow the instruc-
tions of the warning message(s) and
have the brake system checked imme-
diately.
Warning! G
Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the SBC brake system carried out by
qualified technicians only. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for fur-
ther information. The SBC brake system
must be deactivated prior to working on the
system. High pressure is intermittently built
up in the system as part of its automatic
self-test. In addition, the system is automat-
ically activated when the vehicle is unlocked
by SmartKey, when the driver or passenger
door is opened, when the starter switch is
turned to position 1, when the brake pedal
is depressed or when the parking brake is
released. Failure to deactivate the system
prior to maintenance will cause brake pis-
tons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which
may result in injuries (contusions and acid
burns). Extended brake pistons may also
cause injury.
95
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Note on driving with the SBC
앫Following extended periods of only
minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This
improves the grip of the brake pads.
앫After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corro-
sion.
앫On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes fast-
er.
앫Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
nents (e.g. brake pads) should be
installed on your vehicle. Brake pads
not approved by Mercedes-Benz may
impair the safety of your vehicle.
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with the ESP
Models with all-wheel-drive only.
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to
use available traction, e.g. during winter
operation in mountains under snowy
conditions, by applying power to all four
wheels.
Warning! G
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes. Warning! G
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flash-
ing in the speedometer, proceed as follows:
앫While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor
앫Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
96
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
!
Do not tow with one axle raised.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Performance testing must only be con-
ducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine and ignition must be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
when the parking brake is being tested
on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through ESP may
otherwise seriously damage the front
or rear axle brake system.
Operational tests with the engine
running can only be conducted on a
two-axle dynamometer.
97
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
앫With the SmartKey: Removing the
SmartKey from the starter switch acti-
vates the immobilizer.
앫With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en-
gine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
앫With the SmartKey: Inserting the
SmartKey in the starter switch deacti-
vates the immobilizer.
앫With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
gine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever deactivates
the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
98
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫a door
앫the tailgate
앫the hood.
The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
diately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
앫opening the vehicle with the mechani-
cal key.
앫someone opens a door from the inside
if the vehicle was locked from the out-
side with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed within approxi-
mately ten seconds after locking the vehi-
cle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the alarm system is activated.
The indicator lamp in the central locking
switch (컄page 27) begins to flash after
arming the alarm system.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash
once to indicate that the alarm system is
deactivated.
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system* (컄page 269) provid-
ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to
and properly activated, and that neces-
sary cellular service and GPS coverage
are available.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following ele-
ments may not be properly closed:
앫a door
앫the tailgate
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
99
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm
With the SmartKey
왘Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is canceled.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘Pull the outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 35).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is canceled.
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
Arming the tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatical-
ly.
i
The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ed on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system* (컄page 269), provid-
ed that the Tele Aid service was sub-
scribed to and properly activated, and
that necessary cellular service and GPS
coverage are available.
100
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
The button is located on the overhead con-
trol panel.
1Tow-away alarm off button
왘Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
왘Press button 1.
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on briefly.
왘Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock your vehicle again.
Canceling tow-away alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
왘Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘Pull the outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 35).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is canceled.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
when the ignition is switched on.
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Dual-zone automatic climate control
4-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
102
Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi-
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv-
en at the beginning of each segment.
Locking and unlocking
For more information on locking and un-
locking, see “Getting started” (컄page 32)
and (컄page 56).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each key unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
앫the doors
앫the tailgate
앫the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1‹ Lock button
2Š Unlock button* for the tailgate
3Mechanical key locking tab
4ΠUnlock button
5Battery check lamp
6Â Panic button (컄page 86)
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a looked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
The SBC brake system is activated
(컄page 92).
i
You can also open and close the power
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* us-
ing the SmartKey (컄page 223).
104
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if:
앫neither door nor trunk is opened
앫the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫the central locking switch is not acti-
vated
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
lows:
i
Depending on production date, your
vehicle may be equipped with an
acoustic lock and unlock confirmation
signal feature. If your vehicle is
equipped with this feature and the fea-
ture is activated, an acoustic signal will
sound when the vehicle is locked or un-
locked using the SmartKey.
To determine whether or not your vehi-
cle is equipped with this feature, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. If equipped and you wish to ac-
tivate or deactivate the feature, or ad-
just its signal volume, also contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘Press button Œ once.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 104).
앫The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ twice.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once or
twice.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
!
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the SmartKey, then the batteries
of the SmartKey are discharged, or the
SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehi-
cle battery is drained.
앫Check the batteries of the
SmartKey (컄page 112) and re-
place them if necessary
(컄page 408).
앫Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄page 404) as
required.
앫Have the vehicle batteries and their
connections checked.
앫Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄page 405).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter-
ies are in order.
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
You can unlock and open the tailgate sep-
arately.
A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft
(2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate.
왘Press and hold button Š until tail-
gate unlocks and begins to open.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄page 408).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within sig-
nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
!
The tailgate swings open upwards auto-
matically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system: To stop the opening proce-
dure, press button Š. The tailgate
stops moving.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally when closed.
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key. The locking tabs for the
mechanical key portion of the two Smart-
Keys with KEYLESS-GO are a different col-
or to help distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull a door
handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫the doors
앫the tailgate
앫the fuel filler flap
SmartKey
1‹ Lock button
2Š Unlock button* for the tailgate
3Mechanical key locking tab
4ΠUnlock button
5Battery check lamp
6Â Panic button (컄page 86)
i
When any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle is
pulled, the vehicle is centrally un-
locked.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro-
magnetic radiation.
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄page 102).
앫You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
tions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹button).
앫Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
i
You can also open and close the power
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* us-
ing the SmartKey (컄page 223).
i
When you unlock the vehicle, the SBC
brake system is activated (컄page 92).
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
앫Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within ap-
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
tailgate.
앫In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫All the doors must be closed.
앫The brake pedal must be firmly de-
pressed. Do not depress the accel-
erator.
앫If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button
(컄page 36), you can only turn it off
again with this button, even if you have
put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.
앫This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P and
then the SmartKey is inserted in the
starter switch. The SmartKey will then
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO
function and the vehicle’s electrical
system will operate according to the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
switch, even stopping the engine.
앫If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehi-
cle and can no longer be recognized by
the system, the vehicle cannot be
locked or the engine started via the
KEYLESS-GO system.
앫If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
moved from the vehicle while the igni-
tion is switched on (e.g. if passenger
exits the vehicle with the SmartKey),
the message
Key not recognized
will
appear in the multifunction display.
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately (e.g.
place it on the front passenger seat or
insert it in shirt pocket).
앫Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message
Key
still in vehicle
will appear in the
multifunction display.
110
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting Global unlocking
왘Pull the outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
door nor tailgate is opened.
Global locking
왘Press lock button at outside door
handle (컄page 60) or tailgate
(컄page 113).
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
i
Depending on production date, your
vehicle may be equipped with an
acoustic lock and unlock confirmation
signal feature. If your vehicle is
equipped with this feature and the fea-
ture is activated, an acoustic signal will
sound when the vehicle is locked or un-
locked using the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
To determine whether or not your vehi-
cle is equipped with this feature,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. If equipped and you wish to ac-
tivate or deactivate the feature, or ad-
just its signal volume, also contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you pull the driver’s
door handle only the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap unlocks.
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 110).
앫The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global unlocking
왘Pull any outside door handle other than
the driver’s outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global locking
왘Press lock button at outside door
handle (컄page 60).
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature acti-
vated).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
twice.
112
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter-
ies are in order.
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft
(2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate.
The handle is located in the rear license
plate recess.
You can unlock and open the tailgate sep-
arately.
왘Pull on the handle.
or
왘Press and hold button Š until the
tailgate unlocks and opens.
!
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries of the
SmartKey are discharged, or the
SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehi-
cle battery is drained.
앫Check the batteries of the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄page 112) and replace them if
necessary (컄page 408).
앫Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄page 404) as
required.
앫Have the vehicle batteries and their
connections checked.
앫Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄page 405).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄page 408).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within sig-
nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking using the lock button at
tailgate
1Lock button at tailgate
왘Press the lock button 1.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).
For more information, see “Factory set-
ting” (컄page 110).
앫The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
!
The tailgate swings open upwards auto-
matically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening proce-
dure, press button Š on the
SmartKey. The tailgate stops moving.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally when closed (컄page 117).
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
out, the tailgate will open automatically
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized in the rear shelf or inside
the vehicle.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with KEYLESS-GO, the trunk will
lock automatically after closing it.
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
i
You can also lock the vehicle using the
lock button at outside door handle
(컄page 60) or KEYLESS-GO locking/
closing switch (컄page 121).
114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
왘Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1Locking knob
2Inside door handle
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside using the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the
anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
lowing:
앫Press the Œ or ‹ button on
the SmartKey.
앫Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
앫Pull the outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the ve-
hicle.
앫Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 36).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Front doors
왘Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Rear doors
왘Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
tive rear door to unlock door.
왘Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive rear door to open door.
Opening the tailgate
Opening the tailgate from the outside
A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft
(2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
왘Pull on the handle.
The tailgate opens.
!
The tailgate swings open upwards auto-
matically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening proce-
dure, press button Š on the
SmartKey. The tailgate stops moving.
i
The tailgate can also be opened using
the Š button on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally when closed (컄page 117).
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the tailgate from the inside
with handle
You can open the tailgate from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft
(2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate.
The handle is located on the inside of the
tailgate.
1Handle
2Catch
왘To unlock the tailgate, move the
catch 2 to the right.
왘Pull handle 1 down and swing tailgate
upward.
Opening the tailgate from the inside au-
tomatically*
In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system* you can open the tailgate from
the inside if the vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 6.76 ft
(2.06 m) is required to open the tailgate.
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
1Remote tailgate release switch with in-
dicator lamp
!
Always make sure there is sufficient
overhead clearance.
i
To lock the tailgate, move the catch 2
to the left.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children could open the tailgate from the in-
side, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘Pull and hold remote tailgate release
switch 1 until
앫the tailgate is completely open
(opened to its full extent)
or
앫the tailgate has reached the desired
opening angle.
The tailgate stops moving as soon as
you release the switch. The indicator
lamp in the switch comes on. It re-
mains lit until the tailgate is closed
again.
Limiting opening height of tailgate*
Vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system*:
The tailgate opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack
(e.g. presence of an optional MB sport lug-
gage container). When activated, the tail-
gate opens to approximately the height of
the roof edge.
왘Activate the limiting opening height of
tailgate using the control system
(컄page 174).
Closing the tailgate
1Handle
왘Lower tailgate using handle 1.
왘Close tailgate with hands placed flat on
it.
!
The tailgate swings open upwards as
long as you pull and hold the remote
tailgate release switch. Always make
sure there is sufficient overhead clear-
ance. To stop the opening procedure,
release the remote tailgate release
switch.
i
The tailgate can also be opened using
the Š button n the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
1Strap in vehicles with folding bench
seat
왘Pull the tailgate down from the inside of
the vehicle using strap 1.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system* you can close the tailgate sepa-
rately from the outside using the tailgate
closing switch.
1Tailgate closing switch
왘Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
The tailgate closes.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens
slightly.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the tail-
gate. Be especially careful when small chil-
dren are around.
Warning! G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as visibility
blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior.
i
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
out, the tailgate will open automatically
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is rec-
ognized inside the vehicle or in the car-
go compartment.
i
You can also close the tailgate by hand.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the tailgate from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system* you can close the tailgate sepa-
rately from the outside using the tailgate
closing switch.
1Tailgate closing switch
왘Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you.
왘Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
The tailgate closes.
Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the cargo compartment opening when clos-
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the clos-
ing procedure, do one of the following:
앫press the tailgate closing switch 1
앫press the Š button on the SmartKey
앫pull the remote tailgate switch (on the
driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the remote tailgate switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as visibility
blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior.
i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
cargo compartment. You may lock
yourself out.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally after closing it.
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
120
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens
slightly.
i
You can also close the tailgate by hand.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
out, the tailgate will open automatically
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is rec-
ognized in the rear shelf or inside the
vehicle.
Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the cargo compartment opening when clos-
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the clos-
ing procedure, do one of the following:
앫press the tailgate closing switch 1
앫press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
앫pull the remote tailgate switch (on the
driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the tailgate clos-
ing switch can be operated. Therefore, do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning! G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as visibility
blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally after closing it.
To confirm locking all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the tailgate and locking the
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with tailgate opening/closing
system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close
the tailgate and lock the vehicle simulta-
neously from the outside using the
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
1KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch
왘Make sure you have SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘Press switch 1 briefly.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens
slightly.
i
You can also close the tailgate by hand.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
out, the tailgate will open automatically
if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is rec-
ognized in the rear shelf or inside the
vehicle.
Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the cargo compartment opening when clos-
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the clos-
ing procedure, do one of the following:
앫press the tailgate closing switch 1
앫press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO
앫pull the remote tailgate switch (on the
driver’s door)
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
122
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the tailgate automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
For more information on towing the vehi-
cle, see “Towing the vehicle” (컄page 430).
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄page 174).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate from inside using the central lock-
ing switch. This can be useful, for example,
if you want to lock the vehicle before start-
ing to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
locked with the central locking switch.
Warning! G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as visibility
blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior.
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact ex-
ceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫is pushed or towed
앫is on a test stand
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with either switch design A
or B.
The switches are located in the center con-
sole.
Switch design A
1Central locking switch
2Central unlocking switch
Switch design B
1Central locking switch
2Central unlocking switch
Locking
왘Press central locking switch 1.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking
switch 2.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch 1
앫while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the front door
opened from the inside is unlocked.
앫while in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked com-
pletely when a front door is opened
from the inside.
124
Controls in detail
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment,
see the “Getting started” section
(컄page 39).
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
ed or deactivated in the
Convenience
sub-
menu of the control system (컄page 175).
When exiting the vehicle, with the
easy-entry/exit feature activated and
depending on your selection, the steering
wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s
seat moves a few inches to the rear when
you:
앫remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch,
or
앫open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 36) in position 1.
Warning! G
You must make sure that no one can be-
come trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and driver’s seat when the
easy-entry/ exit feature is activated.
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
do one of the following:
앫Press seat adjustment switch
(컄page 30).
앫Move steering column stalk
(컄page 41).
앫Press one of the memory buttons
(컄page 30).
The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop
moving.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver's door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
125
Controls in detail
Seats
When entering the vehicle, with the
easy-entry/exit feature activated, the
steering wheel or, depending on your
selection, the steering wheel and driver’s
seat will return to their last set position or
a factory-set maximum forward position
when you:
앫close the driver’s door, and switch on
the ignition.
or
앫insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button once with driver’s
door closed.
i
If the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,
the steering wheel will no longer be
able to move upward when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
If the current seat position falls into a
factory-set position range and the sys-
tem recognizes the current seat posi-
tion to be rearward enough for easy
entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not
move to the rear when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
i
For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will
not return to its last set position with
the easy-entry/exit feature activated if
the system recognizes the last set posi-
tion as an extreme forward position.
Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at
or move to a factory-set maximum
forward position. To again fully return
the driver’s seat to your last set posi-
tion or to memory position, adjust the
seat to the desired position or press
and hold the respective memory
position switch (컄page 139).
126
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
For more information on head restraint
adjustment, see the “Getting started”
section (컄page 40). Front seat head restraints
Removing front head restraints
왘Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘Pull out head restraint.
Installing front head restraints:
왘Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
tion (컄page 40).
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
i
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier
removal and installation of the head re-
straints.
127
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints
Folding head restraints back
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
Folding head restraints back with switch
in the center console
1Head restraint release switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press the symbol-side on rocker
switch 1 to release the head re-
straints.
The head restraints will fold backward.
Folding head restraints back manually
(rear outer seats)
1Release button
왘Push release button 1 and fold the
head restraints backward.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
128
Controls in detail
Seats
Placing head restraints upright
왘Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.
Head restraint height (rear outer seats)
1Release button
Raising:
왘Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
push release button 1 and pull the
head restraint out.
Lowering:
왘To lower the head restraint, push
release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
!
Make sure the head restraints engage
when placing them upright. Otherwise
their protective function cannot be as-
sured.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
129
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats)
Two different head restraint angle
positions are available.
1Release button
왘Press the release button 1 and tilt the
head restraint to the desired position.
Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
1Release button
Removing rear seat head restraints
왘Fold back head restraint (컄page 127).
왘Pull head restraint to its highest
position.
왘Push release button 1 and pull out
head restraint.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
130
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing rear seat head restraints
왘Insert head restraint and push it down
until it engages.
왘Push button 1 and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
Drive-Dynamic seat* with multicon-
tour features
The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically ad-
justs the lateral support provided by the
backrest to your driving style.
The Drive-Dynamic seat electronically
controls the air pressure in the air cham-
bers of the backrest side bolsters. This
function improves driving comfort and
pleasure.
Additional the Drive-Dynamic seat has a
movable seat cushion and inflatable air
cushions built into the backrest to provide
additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be con-
tinuously varied with switches on the right
side of the seat after turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 or press-
ing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
twice.
1Backrest center
2Backrest bottom
3Seat cushion depth
4Activate drive dynamic function
5Backrest side bolsters
6Massage function
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
!
When installing the head restraints,
make sure that:
앫The proper head restraint for each
seat is installed. The bars of the
head restraint designed for the mid-
dle rear seat are of even length and
shorter than those designed for use
on the outer rear seats.
앫The head restraints engage fully.
131
Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour features
Seat cushion depth
왘Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 3.
Backrest contour
왘Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.
왘Move the backrest support to the bot-
tom by using button 2 or to the center
by using button 1.
Backrest side bolsters
왘Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 5.
Drive-dynamic features
Activating
왘Press button 4 (컄page 130).
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on for five seconds and the following
display appears in the multi-function
display for about five seconds.
Deactivating
왘Press button 4 (컄page 130) again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
Massage function (PULSE)
The massage function can help prevent
muscle tension during long drives.
왘Press button 6 (컄page 130).
The indicator lamp in button 2 comes
on. The air cushions in the lumbar area
pulsate.
i
You can adjust the characteristics of
the Drive-Dynamic seat using the con-
trol system (컄page 177).
i
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory.
The cushion is automatically adjusted
to this setting when the engine is re-
started.
i
The massage function turns off auto-
matically after approximately five
minutes.
132
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
Both switches for the front seats are locat-
ed in the center console. The red indicator
lamps in the switch comes on to show
which heating level you have selected.
1Seat heating switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Switching seat heating on
왘Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired heating level is set.
One or more red indicator lamps on the
switch show the selected heater level.
Switching seat heating off
왘Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps go out.
Level
off No indicator lamps on
1One indicator lamp on
The seat heater automatically
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.
2Two indicator lamps on
The seat heater automatically
switches to level 1 after approxi-
mately ten minutes.
3Three indicator lamps on
The seat heater automatically
switches to level 2 after approxi-
mately five minutes.
i
If one or more of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are flashing, there is in-
sufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto-
matically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
133
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The switch is located on the center con-
sole. Seat ventilation can be activated
manually with the ignition on, or by the
summer opening feature (컄page 223).
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
1Seat ventilation switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Switching seat ventilation on
왘Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
Switching seat ventilation off
왘Press button 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps go out.
Level
3Three indicator lamps lit
2Two indicator lamps lit
1One indicator lamp lit
off No indicator lamp lit
i
The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via sum-
mer opening feature (컄page 223).
i
If one or all of the lamps flash on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insuffi-
cient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
134
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding bench seat in cargo compart-
ment
i
The folding bench seat in the cargo
compartment is approved only for per-
sons up to a height of 4.6 ft (1.40 m)
and a maximum weight of 110 lbs
(50 kg).
The twin roller blind must be installed
when the folding bench seat is in use.
Warning! G
When using the folding bench seat in the
cargo compartment, the seats in front of it
must be in the driving position.
Only drive when the head restraints for the
folding bench seat have been properly ad-
justed. The head restraints should be adjust-
ed so that the back of the head is supported
at approximately eye level. This can reduce
a child’s risk of injury in the event of an ac-
cident.
Warning! G
Make sure that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the body and is engaged in the
seat belt buckle.
Damaged covers should be replaced with
original covers only.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even when they are secured in a child
restraint system.
Make sure that luggage and other objects
are adequately secured. The load could oth-
erwise injure someone in the event of an ac-
cident, during hard braking or steering
maneuvers.
135
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding out the folding bench seat
1Release handle for seat backrest
2Release handle for seat cushion
Before folding out the seat backrest, you
must:
앫fold the rear seat backrests into an up-
right position and lock them into place
앫move the handle for the twin roller
blind into the upper position
왘Pull release handle 1 and fold seat
backrest for the folding bench seat up-
ward.
3Mountings for seat belts
왘Hook seat belts into mountings 3.
왘Pull release handle 2 and fold seat
cushion for the folding bench seat into
sitting position.
왘Press seat cushion as far down as it will
go.
The backrest will then also engage
properly.
왘Fold head restraints into upright posi-
tion.
i
The rear seat backrests can be adjust-
ed to a more reclined position to make
the folding bench seat more comfort-
able (컄page 249).
136
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing seat cushions
Removing
1Seat guides
2Seat cushion
왘Fold seat cushion 2 upward and re-
move it from seat guides 1.
Installing
왘Insert seat cushion 2 into seat guides
1 from behind 3 at a slight angle.
왘Fold seat cushion 2 back into original
position 4 until it engages.
Folding back folding bench seat
1Tab
2Backrest
왘Pull seat cushion upward using tab 1
and fold it back into original position
until it engages.
i
You must remove the seat cushion
when you want to raise the loading
floor, e.g. in the event of a flat tire.
137
Controls in detail
Seats
1Release knob
왘Press release knob 1 and fold head
restraints down.
1Release catch
왘Press release catch 1 and push head
restraints as far in as they will go.
왘Fold seat backrest of folding bench
seat back into original position until it
engages.
!
To avoid damage, insert the head re-
straints completely into their guides
and engage the seat belt buckles in
their guides.
138
Controls in detail
Memory function
You can store up to three different settings
for each SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
The following settings are stored when
using the buttons on the driver’s door:
앫Driver’s seat, backrest and head
restraint position and settings for
multicontour seat
앫Steering wheel position
앫Exterior rear view mirror positions
These SmartKey-dependent memory
settings can be deactivated if desired. For
information on SmartKey-dependent mem-
ory settings, see “Setting SmartKey-de-
pendency” (컄page 176).
The following settings are not
SmartKey-dependent. They are stored
when using the buttons on the front pas-
senger door:
앫Front passenger seat, backrest and
head restraint position and settings for
multicontour seat
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv-
er should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to
ensure adequate control, reach and
comfort. The head restraint should also
be adjusted for proper height. See also
the section on air bags (컄page 63) for
more information on proper seat posi-
tioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera-
tion and comfort. Both the interior and
outside rear view mirrors should be ad-
justed for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
Warning! G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
139
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and stored position
button are located on the door.
MMemory button
1, 2, 3 Stored positions
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
or
왘Open the respective door and insert
the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Storing positions in memory
왘Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the de-
sired position (컄page 38).
왘Press memory button M.
왘Release memory button and press
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the select-
ed position.
Recalling positions from memory
왘Press and hold stored position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
have completely moved to the stored
positions.
!
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest
is in an excessively reclined position.
Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
i
Releasing the stored position button
stops movement to the stored posi-
tions immediately.
140
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄page 192). 1Passenger side, exterior rear view mir-
ror
2Adjustment button
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press button 1.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘Press memory button M.
왘Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror for each SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
the “Getting started” section (컄page 51).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
MOff
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄page 170)
UAutomatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄page 170)
CParking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on
BLow beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combi-
nation switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps
ˆStanding lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
¥Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
¨Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is regis-
tered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
142
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
앫Low beam headlamps
앫Tail and parking lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in the starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps will switch on and off
automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the licence plate lamps and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
i
With the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the engine turned off
with KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s
door open, a warning sounds if the
parking lamps or low beam headlamps
are switched on.
The message
Switch off lamps
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
Warning! G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright am-
bient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the head-
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
143
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are automatically
switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the fol-
lowing lams will switch on additionally:
앫Tail and parking lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps.
Canada only
The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.
When the engine is running, and you
앫turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.
앫turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime run-
ning lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄page 51).
USA only
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime run-
ning lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (컄page 170).
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄page 51).
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam head-
lamps cannot be switched on.
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.
144
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security illu-
mination
The locator lighting and the night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see (컄page 171) and
(컄page 172).
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
왘Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄page 51).
왘Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄page 24).
왘Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps are switched off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Warning! G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from
U to B will briefly switch off the head-
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
i
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam head-
lamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam
headlamps. Consult your State or Prov-
ince Motor Vehicle Regulations regard-
ing allowable lamp operation.
i
Fog lamp cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the fog
lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
145
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamps (driver’s side only)
왘Switch on the front fog lamps
(컄page 144).
왘Pull out the exterior lamp switch to sec-
ond stop.
The rear fog lamp are switched on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄page 24).
왘Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp exterior switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
1High beam
2High beam flasher
High beam
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or U (컄page 141).
왘Push the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄page 24).
왘Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to switch off the high
beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
왘Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
146
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is locat-
ed on the upper part of the center console.
1Hazard warning flasher switch
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1 again.
i
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
vated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the re-
spective turn signals will operate when
the ignition is switched on.
i
If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to
switch it off.
147
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
1Left front reading lamp on/off
2Rear interior lighting on/off
3Automatic control on/off
4Front interior lighting on/off
5Right front reading lamp on/off
6Ambient lighting
7Interior lighting
8Front reading lamps
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Automatic control
Activating
왘Press automatic control switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness when you:
앫unlock the vehicle
앫remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫open a door
앫open the tailgate
The interior lighting switches off automati-
cally following an adjustable time delay.
For more information, see “Setting interior
lighting delayed shut-off” (컄page 173).
Deactivating
왘Press automatic control switch 3
again.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:
앫unlock the vehicle
앫remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫open a door
앫open the tailgate
i
Leaving an interior light switch in the
ON position for extended periods of
time with the engine turned off could
result in a discharged battery.
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lighting switches off automatically after
approximately five minutes.
148
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Front interior lighting
왘Press front interior lighting switch 4.
The front interior lighting switches on.
왘Press front interior lighting switch 4
again.
The front interior lighting switches off.
Rear interior lighting
왘Press button 2.
The lights in the rear passenger com-
partment go on.
왘Press button 2 again.
The lights in the rear passenger com-
partment go out.
Front reading lamps
The front reading lamps are located in the
lower edge of the interior rear view mirror.
왘Press front reading lamp switch 1
or 5 to switch on the desired front
reading lamp.
왘Press front reading lamp switch 1
or 5 again to switch off the respective
front reading lamp.
i
The setting selected for the interior
lighting is used for the cargo compart-
ment as well.
If the tailgate remains open, the cargo
compartment lamp switches off auto-
matically after approximately ten min-
utes.
149
Controls in detail
Lighting
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the cor-
responding door entry lamps will switch on
in the darkness when you open a door and
the automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps will switch on when
the corresponding door is closed.
Interior lighting in the rear
The overhead control panel is located
above the rear seat bench.
1Ambient lighting switch, to brighten
2Rear reading lamp
3Rear reading lamp on/off
4Rear interior lamp
5Ambient lighting
6Ambient lighting switch, to brighten
Rear reading lamps
왘Press desired rear reading lamp
switch 3 to switch on the correspond-
ing rear reading lamp.
왘Press respective rear reading lamp
switch 3 again to switch off the corre-
sponding rear reading lamp.
Ambient lighting
왘Press ambient lighting switch 1 or 6
repeatedly until ambient lighting 5
has reached the desired intensity.
You can switch the ambient lighting on and
off using the control system (컄page 173).
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
headlamps, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately five
minutes.
150
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄page 24).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫open a door
앫turn on the ignition
앫press the reset button (컄page 24)
앫switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster set-
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄page 165).
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button (컄page 24) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instru-
ment cluster.
To brighten illumination
왘Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster clockwise (컄page 24).
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster counterclockwise (컄page 24).
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
151
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature indicator
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera-
ture may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-
ter display (컄page 153).
왘If it is not displayed, press the è or
ÿ repeatedly until the trip odome-
ter appears.
왘Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄page 24) until
the trip odometer is reset.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
i
Excessive coolant temperature trigger
a warning in the multifunction display
(컄page 356).
152
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer de-
notes excessive engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Outside temperature indicator
The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (컄page 24). For
information on how to select the unit of the
displayed temperature, i.e. degrees
Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F),
see “Selecting temperature display mode”
(컄page 165).
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by com-
parison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious en-
gine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
왔Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to:
앫call up information about your vehicle
앫change vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control sys-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster dis-
play, and much more.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
Multifunction display
1Outside temperature
2Trip odometer
3Automatic transmission program mode
4Main odometer
5Current gear selector lever position
Above illustration shows the standard dis-
play.
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄page 156).
i
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
dio, CD player) will appear in English,
regardless of the language selected.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions per-
mit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km /h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system
(컄page 153) are controlled by the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
function steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunc-
tion display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or sub-
menus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
erations under
Audio
, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
1Multifunction display in the
speedometer
Operating the control system
2Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
æup/to increase
çdown/to decrease
3Telephone*:
Press button
sto take a call
tto end a call
4Menu systems:
Press button
èfor next menu
ÿfor previous menu
5Moving within a menu:
Press button
jfor next display
kfor previous display
155
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being ar-
ranged in a circular pattern.
앫If you press button è or ÿ re-
peatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫If you press button k or j re-
peatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the
Settings
menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄page 162).
The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
is installed in you vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1Menu 2Menu 3Menu 4Menu 5Menu 6Menu 7Menu 8
Standard dis-
play
AUDIO NAV* Distronic* Vehicle status
message mem-
ory
Settings Trip computer Telephone
(컄page 158) (컄page 158) (컄page 160) (컄page 160) (컄page 161) (컄page 162) (컄page 178) (컄page 179)
Commands/submenus
Digital speed-
ometer
Select radio
station
Activate
route guid-
ance
Call up set-
tings
Call up vehicle
malfunction,
warning and sys-
tem status mes-
sages stored in
memory
Reset to facto-
ry settings
Fuel consumption
statistics after
start
Load phone
book
Call up mainte-
nance system
display
Operate CD
player
Instrument
cluster sub-
menu
Fuel consumption
statistics since
the last reset
Search for
name in
phone book
Check tire
pressure*
Time/Date
submenu
Call up range
Check engine
oil level
Lighting sub-
menu
Vehicle sub-
menu
Convenience
submenu
Dynamic seat*
submenu
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
You can select the functions in the stan-
dard display menu with button k
or j.
The following functions are available:
Display digital speedometer
왘Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
AUDIO menu
The functions in the
Audio
menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message
AUDIO off
is shown in the
display.
The following functions are available:
Select radio station
왘Turn on the radio. Refer to separate op-
erating instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned sta-
tion in the display.
1Waveband setting
2Station frequency
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not neces-
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Function Page
Call up digital speedometer 158
Call up maintenance display 339
Check tire pressure* 318
Check engine oil level 301
Function Page
Select radio station 158
Select satellite radio station* 159
Operate CD player 159
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Select satellite radio station*
The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap-
plication.
왘Select SAT radio with the correspond-
ing softkey in the radio menu.
1SAT mode and preset number
2Setting for station selection using
memory
3Channel name or number
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
Operate the CD player
왘Turn on the radio and select the CD
player. Refer to separate operating in-
structions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
1Current CD (for CD changer*)
2Current track
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio,
see separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
i
Additional optional satellite radio
equipment and a subscription to satel-
lite radio service provider are required
for satellite radio operation. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions. i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the COMAND
system key pad located in the center
console.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu
The
NAV
menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message
NAV
in the
display.
앫If the navigation system is switched off,
the message
NAV off
is shown in the
display.
앫If the navigation system is switched on,
the message
NAV Active
is shown in
the display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
structions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
Distronic* menu
Use the
Distronic
menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
is active or inactive.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
tion of this manual (컄page 232) for in-
structions on how to activate Distronic.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
pictures in the display.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard display in the display.
1Vehicle ahead, if detected
2Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4Your vehicle
5Symbol for activated distance warning
function
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated
When Distronic is activated,
Distronic
and the set speed are seen in the display.
1Distronic activated
Vehicle status message memory menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the sys-
tem. Such messages appear in the multi-
function display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message mem-
ory appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
No vehicle status messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
sage in the display is:
NO MESSAGES
Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction dis-
play:
Warning! G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄page 362).
162
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be dis-
played in the order in which they have
occurred. For malfunction and warning
messages, see “Vehicle status messag-
es in the multifunction display”
(컄page 362).
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunc-
tion display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the
Settings
menu there are two func-
tions:
앫The function
To reset: Press reset
button for 3 seconds
, with which you
can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings.
앫A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the
Settings
menu is seen in the
display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
menus to the factory settings.
왘Press the reset button in the instru-
ment cluster (컄page 24) for approxi-
mately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
왘Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. You will then only see
high-priority messages in the multi-
function display (컄page 362).
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘Press button k or j.
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
왘Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
Resetting the functions of a submenu
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘Move to a function in the submenu.
왘Press the reset button (컄page 24) in
the instrument cluster for approximate-
ly three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
왘Press the reset button again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
164
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE DYNAMIC SEAT*
Select temperature dis-
play mode
Synchronizing the
time
Set daytime running
lamp mode
(USA only)
Set automatic lock-
ing
Activate
easy-entry/exit
feature
Set level for dynam-
ic seat, driver
Select speedometer dis-
play mode
Set time (hours) Set locator lighting Limiting opening
height of tailgate*
Set SmartKey-
dependency
Set level for dynam-
ic seat, passenger
Select language Set time (minutes) Ambient lighting Set parking position
for exterior rear
view mirror
Select display (speed dis-
play or outside tempera-
ture) for status line
Set date (month) Exterior lamps de-
layed shut-off
Select display (speed dis-
play or outside tempera-
ture) for basic display
Set date (day) Interior lighting de-
layed shut-off
Tire pressure unit dis-
play*
Set date (year)
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the
Instr. cluster
submenu via
the
Settings
menu. Use the
Instr. clus-
ter
submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
Selecting temperature display mode
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Temperature indicator
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the temper-
ature unit to
°C
(degrees Celsius) or
°F
(degrees Fahrenheit).
Selecting speedometer display mode
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Display unit Speed-/odometer
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set speedome-
ter unit to
km
or
miles
.
Function Page
Select temperature display
mode
165
Select speedometer display
mode
165
Select language 166
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature) for status
display
166
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature) for basic
display
167
Tire pressure display* 167
166
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Language
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the lan-
guage to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Available languages:
앫German
앫English
앫French
앫Italian
앫Spanish
Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature) for status display
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Status line display
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the sta-
tus line to degrees Fahrenheit (
°F
) or
miles
.
i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.
167
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature) for basic display
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Basic display
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the dis-
play permanently shown in the multi-
function display.
Tire pressure display*
Use this function to set the unit for the tire
pressure display.
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the
Instr,
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Display unit Tire pressure
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired tire pressure unit.
Time/Date submenu
Access the
Time/Date
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Time/Date
sub-
menu to change the time and date display
settings. The following functions are avail-
able:
Function Page
Synchronizing the time 168
Set time (hours) 168
Set time (minutes) 168
Set date (month) 169
Set date (day) 169
Set date (year) 169
i
Information on setting the time, refer to
separate COMAND instructions.
168
Controls in detail
Control system
Synchronizing the time
This function can only be seen on vehicles
with COMAND and navigation module*.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Time sync. with head unit
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired setting.
Set time (hours)
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Clock, hours
.
The selection marker is on the hour set-
ting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the hours.
왘Confirm by pressing reset button.
Set time (minutes)
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Clock, minutes
.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the minutes.
왘Confirm by pressing reset button.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
Set date (month)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Set date month
.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the month.
Set date (day)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Set date day
.
The selection marker is on the day
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the day.
Set date (year)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Set date year
.
The selection marker is on the year
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set the year.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the
Lighting
submenu via the
Set-
tings
menu. Use the
Lighting
submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Light-
ing
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Lamp circuit headlamp
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select
manual
or
daytime running lamp (
constant
)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch at
position M or U the low beam head-
lamps are switched on when the engine is
running.
In low ambient light conditions the follow-
ing lamps will switch on additionally:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime run-
ning lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄page 141).
Function Page
Set daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
170
Set locator lighting 171
Ambient light level 173
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 172
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 173
171
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on when the vehicle is unlocked us-
ing the Πbutton on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* during dark-
ness:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
앫Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off
automatically after approximately 40 sec-
onds.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see
Function Surround
lighting
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function
on
.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activat-
ed.
i
For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting
submenu to factory settings
while driving (컄page 163) will not de-
activate the daytime running lamp
mode.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Lighting - Can-
not be completely reset to factory
settings while driving.
172
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off)
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the exterior lamps to il-
luminate during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and all doors closed.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on after
you have removed the SmartKey from the
starter switch or, when using
KEYLESS-GO*, after turning off the engine
and open the driver’s door:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
앫Front fog lamps
If you do not open a door after removing
the SmartKey from the starter switch, the
lamps will switch off automatically after
approximately 60 seconds.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see
Headlamps delayed
shut-off
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the desired lamp-on period.
앫
0 sec.
, the delayed shut-off feature
is deactivated.
앫
15 sec.
,
30 sec.
,
45 sec.
or
60 sec.
, select the desired lamp-on
period.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off fea-
ture is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the de-
layed shut-off feature:
왘Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton on the gear selector lever
(컄page 36).
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and how
long you would like the interior lighting to
remain lit during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see
Interior lamp delayed
shut-off
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the desired lamp-on period.
You can select:
앫
0 sec.
, the delayed shut-off feature
is deactivated.
앫
5 sec.,
10 sec.
,
15 sec.
or
20 sec.
, the interior lighting de-
layed shut-off feature is activated
with the desired lamp-on period.
Setting ambient lighting
Using this function to adjust the brightness
of the ambient lighting.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see
Ambient light Level
in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the desired brightness of the ambient
lighting.
The setting
1
represents the darkest
level and setting
5
the brightest level.
The ambient light is switched off at set-
ting
0
.
174
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu
Access the
Vehicle
submenu via the
Set-
tings
menu. Use the
Vehicle
submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The follow-
ing functions are available:
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the au-
tomatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km /h).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Vehicle
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Automatic door lock
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to switch
Automat-
ic door lock
on
or
off
.
Limiting opening height of tailgate*
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the limiting opening height of tailgate.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Vehicle
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the
display:
Opening limiter Tailgate
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to switch
Opening
limiter Tailgate on
or
off
.
Function Page
Set automatic locking 174
Limiting opening height of tail-
gate*
174
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu
Access the
Convenience
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Convenience
sub-
menu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Activating easy-entry/exit feature*
Use this function to activate and deacti-
vate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄page 124).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the
Convenience
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Function Easy-entry feature
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to change
the easy-entry/exit setting.
Function Page
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 175
Set SmartKey-dependency 176
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
176
Warning! G
You must make sure that no one can be-
come trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and driver’s seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement,
do one of the following:
앫Press seat adjustment switch
(컄page 30).
앫Move steering column stalk
(컄page 41).
앫Press one of the memory position
buttons or the memory button M
(컄page 30).
The steering wheel and driver’s seat stop
moving.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver's door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
176
Controls in detail
Control system
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature:
Setting SmartKey-dependency
Use this function to set whether the mem-
ory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel, the mirrors and other settings of
the control system should be stored sepa-
rately for each SmartKey (컄page 102).
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the
Convenience
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Key-dependent
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to set
SmartKey-dependency to
on
or
off
.
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the
Mirror adjustment parking aid
function to select whether the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneu-
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating ex-
terior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄page 192).
왘Move the selection marker to the
Convenience
submenu using the æ
or ç button.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Mirror adjustment parking aid
.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
off
The easy-entry/ex-
it feature is deacti-
vated.
Steering col.
Only the steering
column is moved.
Steering col. +
seat
Both the steering
column and the
seat are moved.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
function
on
or
off
.
Dynamic seat* submenu
Access the
Dynamic Seat
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Dynamic Seat
submenu to change the settings for the dy-
namic seats. The following functions are
available:
Adjusting the dynamic seat
The function dynamic seat adjustment lets
you determine the way the seat adjusts
while driving.
왘Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Dynamic Seat
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, driver
for the driver seat or
Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, fr. pass.
for the passenger seat.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to switch function
Level 1
or
Level 2
.
The following settings are available:
Function Page
Adjust driver seat 177
Adjust passenger seat 177
Level 1
(Comfort) Less lat-
eral support and
slow air pressure
build-up in the air
chambers of the
backrest side bol-
sters
Level 2
(Sporty) Strong lat-
eral support and
fast air pressure
build-up in the air
chambers of the
backrest side bol-
sters
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left
display:
After start
.
1Distance driven since start
2Time elapsed since start
3Average speed since start
4Average fuel consumption since start
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
After reset
.
1Distance driven since last reset
2Time elapsed since last reset
3Average speed since last reset
4Average fuel consumption since last re-
set
Function Page
Fuel consumption statistics after
start
178
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
178
Call up range (distance to empty) 179
179
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄page 24) until
the value is reset to
0
.
Call up range (distance to empty)
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play:
Range:
In the display you will see the calculat-
ed range based on the current fuel tank
level.
TEL menu*
i
All statistics stored since the last en-
gine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 with-
in this time period.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi-
tions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second. 컄컄
180
Controls in detail
Control system
You can use the functions in the
TEL
menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
왘Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the
Tel
menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is:
PHONE off
.
앫If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network,
READY
appears in the display.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can op-
erate it using the control system.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
왘Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the dis-
play you see the length of the call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button t.
컄컄
181
Controls in detail
Control system
Ending a call
왘Press button t.
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby mes-
sage.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the
Tel
menu in the dis-
play.
왘Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
Please wait
.
When the message
Please wait
disap-
pears, the phone book has been load-
ed.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in as-
cending or descending alphabetical or-
der.
왘Press button s.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
앫If no connection is made, the con-
trol system stores the dialed num-
ber in the redial memory.
Redialing
The control system stores the most recent-
ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing t.
컄컄
182
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the
Tel
menu in the dis-
play.
왘Press button s.
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
컄컄
183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄page 47).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjust-
ments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its gear shift program.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
The automatic transmission selects indi-
vidual gears automatically, depending on:
앫the gear selector lever
position D(컄page 187) with
gear ranges (컄page 186)
앫the selected shift program (C/S)
(컄page 188)
앫the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄page 189)
앫the vehicle speed
i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
184
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
1Current gear range/gear selector lever
position
2Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector lever
position and program mode (
C
/
S
) appear
in the multifunction display.
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫limiting the gear range
앫changing gears manually
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
185
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄page 186).
Upshifting
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simul-
taneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until
D
reappears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
186
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display (컄page 184). If you
press on the accelerator when the engine
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit se-
lected.
Effect
ïThe transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
îThe transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).
éThe transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
èThe transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
Effect
çThe transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫on steep downgrades
앫in mountainous regions
앫under extreme operating
conditions
æThe transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
187
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ìPark position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄page 405).
íReverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
Effect
ëNeutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the trans-
mission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
êDrive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
188
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
1Program mode selector switch
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (
C
/
S
) are
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄page 184).
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄page 56).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hey or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with acce ss to an unlocked ve hicle. Children
could move the gear selector lever from
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
189
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired shift program appears in
the multifunction display.
Select Cfor comfort driving:
앫The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
!
Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
i
The last selected program
mode (Cor S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
190
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Stopping
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
왘Leave the transmission in gear.
왘Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop longer with the engine
idling or on an uphill gradient:
왘Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
왘Set the parking brake.
Maneuvering
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘Accelerate gently.
왘Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
mission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated.
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Move gear selector lever to P.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Wait at least ten seconds before
restarting.
왘Restart the engine.
왘Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Warning! G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.
191
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see
“Windshield wipers” (컄page 52).
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
1Headlamp washer button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄page 306).
Rear view mirror
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄page 41).
Auto-dimming mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
앫the ignition is switched on, and
앫incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mir-
ror
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫reverse gear is engaged
앫the interior lighting is turned on
Warning! G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sen-
sors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror does not react,
for example, if the rear window sunshade is
in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning! G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
192
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
1Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
왘Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄page 140).
왘Make sure the
Mirror adjustment
parking aid
function in the
Conve-
nience
submenu of the control system
is switched to
on
(컄page 176).
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫ten seconds after you put the gear se-
lector lever out of position R
앫immediately once your vehicle exceeds
a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
193
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
1Sun visor
2Mounting
왘Swing sun visor 1 down when you ex-
perience glare.
1Sun visor
2Mirror cover
3Mirror lamp
4Vanity mirror
왘Make sure the sun visor is properly en-
gaged in the mounting.
왘Lift the mirror cover to access the mir-
ror.
Lamp 3 switches on.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
194
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1Mounting
2Additional visor*
3Sun visor
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
왘Pivot sun visor to the side.
The sun visors are extendable.
왘Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
Roller sunblind* in the rear doors
왘Pull the roller sunblind out using the
hooks.
왘Attach the hooks at the top.
i
If sunlight enters through a side win-
dow, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
Mirror lamp 3 (컄page 193) will
switch off.
!
Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back, as the retractor
could be damaged.
195
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
ation depending on the outside
temperature.
Activating
왘Press button F (컄page 198) or
(컄page 210) or 1(컄page 199)
or (컄page 211) on the respective
climate control panel.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button F or 1 again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operat-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically turns itself back on.
196
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
197
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Rear air vents
1Climate control panel
2Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
3Left center air vent, adjustable
4Center air vent, fixed
5Right center air vent, adjustable
6Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
8Side defroster vent, fixed
9Side air vent, adjustable
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the
sliders for the center vents 3 and 5
to the middle position.
1Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2Right rear center air vent, adjust-
able
3Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right rear center air vent
4Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent
198
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with either climate control
panel design A or B.
Climate control panel design A
1Left-side temperature control
2Windshield defroster
3Increase air volume
4Air distribution
5Rear window defroster
6Right-side temperature control
7Residual heat/ventilation
8AC cooling on/off
9Air distribution display
aClimate control on/off
bAir volume display
cDecrease air volume
dAir recirculation
eAir distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
199
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control panel design B
1Left-side temperature control
2Windshield defroster
3Increase air volume
4Air distribution
5Rear window defroster
6Right-side temperature control
7AC cooling on/off
8Air distribution display
9Climate control on/off
aAir volume display
bDecrease air volume
cAir recirculation
dAir distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
200
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
The climate control is operational whenev-
er the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the au-
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the se-
lected interior temperature and the cur-
rent outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is activated or
AC mode is deactivated (컄page 206).
Warning! G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents in the footwell can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frost-
bite to unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the footwell air vents. If necessary
change the air flow using the air distribution
controls (컄page 198) to direct the air away
from the footwell air vents.
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
tion) may require replacement of the fil-
ter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
jects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.
201
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating the dual-zone automatic
climate control system
Deactivating
왘Press button M (컄page 198) or
button ´ (컄page 199).
Reactivating
왘Press button M (컄page 198) or
button ´ (컄page 199) again.
or
왘Press any button on the climate control
panel (컄page 198) or (컄page 199).
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 1 and 6
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) to separate-
ly adjust the air temperature on each side
of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature set-
ting in small increments, preferably start-
ing at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
왘Turn the temperature control 1 or 6
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) slightly
to the right.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Decreasing
왘Turn the temperature control 1 or 6
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) slightly
to the left.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use air distribution control 4
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) to adjust the
air distribution.
i
When the air conditioning is switched
off, the outside air supply and circula-
tion are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise
the windows could fog up.
Symbol Function
aDirects air through the center,
side and rear passenger com-
partment air vents
ZDirects air to the windows
XDirects air into the entire
vehicle interior
YDirects air to the footwells
202
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting manually
왘Press air distribution rocker switch 4
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) until the
display shows the desired setting.
The indicator lamp on the Ubutton
goes out and the current air distribu-
tion appears in the air distribution
display 9 (컄page 198) or 8
(컄page 199).
Adjusting automatically
왘Press button U(컄page 198) or
(컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution is adjust-
ed automatically.
Adjusting center air vents:
The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6
(컄page 197) center air vents are automat-
ically positioned for optimum interior air-
flow. In this position, center air vent 4
(컄page 197) and adjustable left and right
center vents 3 and 5 (컄page 197) are
fully opened.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄page 52).
왘Press the Ubutton.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting manually
Five blower speeds are available.
왘Press to decrease or Q to in-
crease air volume (컄page 198) or
(컄page 199) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on the Ubutton
(컄page 198) or (컄page 199) goes
out. The selected blower speed is
shown in the display.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press button U(컄page 198) or
(컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the Ubutton
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
203
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting center air vents:
The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6
(컄page 197) center air vents are automat-
ically positioned for optimum interior air-
flow. In this position, center air vent 4
(컄page 197) and adjustable left and right
center vents 3 and 5 (컄page 197) are
fully opened.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄page 52).
왘Press the Ubutton.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Defrosting
Activating
왘Press button P (컄page 198)
or 0 (컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following func-
tions:
앫maximum blowing and heating
power
앫air flows onto the windshield
and the front side windows
앫the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
왘Press button P (컄page 198)
or 0 (컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
204
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘Press button O (컄page 198) or
(컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Window fogging may impair visibility and
endanger you and others.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
or tilt/sliding panel* will close.
Warning! G
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone
being harmed by the opening or closing pro-
cedure.
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger:
The closing of the side windows can be im-
mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
respective window switch. The closing of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding
sunroof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button.
205
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘Press button O (컄page 198) or
(컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C), the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside tempera-
tures.
If you have turned off the air condition-
ing (컄page 206) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
will return to their previous position.
206
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Climate control panel design A
왘Press button ± (컄page 198).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The cooling function is switched off.
Climate control panel design B
왘Press button œ (컄page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function is switched off.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
Climate control panel design A
왘Press button ± (컄page 198) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Climate control panel design B
왘Press button œ (컄page 199) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning! G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
207
Controls in detail
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation*
(available on climate control panel de-
sign A only)
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0or 1, or remove it from
the starter switch.
왘Press button T (컄page 198).
The indicator lamp on button comes
on.
Deactivating
왘Press button T (컄page 198).
The indicator lamp on button goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫when the ignition is switched on
앫after about 30 minutes
앫if the battery voltage drops
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air con-
ditioning is losing refrigerant. The com-
pressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
How long the system will provide heat-
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
tion control setting.
208
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
209
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
1Climate control panel
2Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
3Left center air vent, adjustable
4Air vent, fixed
5Right center air vent, adjustable
6Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
8Side defroster vent, fixed
9Side air vent, adjustable
1Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vent
2Side air vent, adjustable
1Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2Right rear center air vent, adjust-
able
3Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right rear center air vent
4Temperature rocker switch, right
5Display
6Temperature rocker switch, left
7Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent
210
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with either climate control
design panel A or B.
Climate control panel design A
1Air distribution, left
2Defrosting
3Temperature rocker switch, left
4Display
5Temperature rocker switch, right
6Rear window defroster
7Air distribution, right
8Air distribution and air volume, right
(automatic, manual)
9AC cooling on/off
aRear air-conditioning remote control
bIncrease air volume
cClimate control on/off
dDecrease air volume
eResidual heat/ventilation
fAir recirculation
gAir distribution and air volume, left
(automatic, manual)
211
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Climate control panel design B
1Air distribution, left
2Defrosting
3Temperature rocker switch, left
4Display
5Temperature rocker switch, right
6Rear window defroster
7Air distribution, right
8Air distribution and air volume, right
(automatic, manual)
9AC cooling on/off
aRear air-conditioning remote control
bIncrease air volume
cClimate control on/off
dDecrease air volume
eAir recirculation
fAir distribution and air volume, left
(automatic, manual)
212
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
The climate control is a 4-zone intelligent
climate control system. Your vehicle interi-
or is divided into 4 zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the climate
control determines the relation of the sun
to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual
zone.
You can set the temperature for each of
the 4 zones separately. These settings can
be assigned to a SmartKey and stored in
memory (컄page 176).
The climate control is operational whenev-
er the engine is running. It cools the vehi-
cle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside tem-
perature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the climate control sys-
tem in either the automatic or manual
mode.
Warning! G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents in the footwell can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burn or frost-
bite to unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the footwell air vents. If necessary
change the air flow using the air distribution
controls (컄page 210) to direct the air away
from the footwell air vents.
213
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode (컄page 210) is
activated or AC mode (컄page 211) is de-
activated.
Deactivating the 4-zone automatic
climate control system
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the climate con-
trol system.
왘Press button M (컄page 210) or
button ´ (컄page 211) until the dis-
play is cleared.
The climate control system is deacti-
vated.
Reactivating
왘Press button M (컄page 210) or
button ´ (컄page 211) again.
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
tion) may require replacement of the fil-
ter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
jects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window. i
When the air conditioning is switched
off, the outside air supply and circula-
tion are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise
the windows could fog up.
214
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Setting the temperature
Use temperature control rocker
switches 3 and 5 (컄page 210) or
(컄page 211) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small incre-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
Increasing
왘Push top of temperature control rocker
switch 3 and/or 5 (컄page 210) or
(컄page 211).
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Decreasing
왘Push bottom of temperature control
rocker switch 3 and/or 5
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211).
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211) to separate-
ly adjust the air distribution on each side of
the passenger compartment. The following
symbols are found on the controls:
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
ture, air volume and air distribution.
Symbol Function
aDirects air through the center,
side and rear passenger com-
partment air vents
ZDirects air to the windows
XDirects air into the entire vehi-
cle interior
YDirects air to the footwells
215
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting manually
왘Turn air distribution controls on each
side of the passenger compartment to
the desired symbol.
The indicator lamp in the U button
goes out.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press left or right U button
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211).
The indicator lamp in the U button
illuminates. The air distribution is ad-
justed automatically.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘Press the left or right U button
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211).
Adjusting air volume
Use button U for automatic mode or air
volume controls or Q
(컄page 210) to adjust air volume
manually.
Adjusting manually
Nine blower speeds are available.
왘Press to decrease or Q
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211) to in-
crease air volume to the desired level.
The
AUTO
display disappears and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed is shown in the
display.
Adjusting automatically
왘Press left or right U button
(컄page 210) or (컄page 211).
The
AUTO
display appears and the air
volume is adjusted automatically.
Defrosting
Activating
왘Press button P (컄page 210)
or 0 (컄page 211).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
앫maximum blowing and heating
power
앫air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫the air recirculation mode is
switched off
i
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
216
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Deactivating
왘Press button P (컄page 210)
or 0 (컄page 211).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display “MAX COOL” appears
in the front and rear display.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘Press button O (컄page 210) or
(컄page 211).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Warning! G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Window fogging may impair visibility and
endanger you and others.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the tilt/sliding sun-
roof* will close.
217
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Deactivating
왘Press button O(컄page 210) or
(컄page 211).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
앫after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Warning! G
Never operate the side windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger:
The closing of the side windows can be im-
mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
respective window switch. The closing of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding
sunroof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
앫at high outside temperatures
앫if the concentration of carbon mon-
oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
side air increases, for example in a
tunnel)
If you have turned off the air condition-
ing (컄page 210) or (컄page 211) or
the outside temperature is below 41°F
(5°C), the air recirculation mode will
not switch on automatically.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and the tilt/sliding sun-
roof* will return to their previous posi-
tion.
218
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
Climate control panel design A
왘Press button ± (컄page 210).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
ACOFF in the display comes on.
The cooling function is switched off.
Climate control panel design B
왘Press button œ (컄page 211).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function is switched off.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
Climate control panel design A
왘Press button ± (컄page 210) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
ACOFF in the display goes out.
Climate control panel design B
왘Press button œ (컄page 211) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
i
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Warning! G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
219
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Residual heat and ventilation (available
on 4-zone automatic climate control
panel design A only)
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 or 1, or remove it from
the starter switch.
왘Press button T(컄page 210).
REST in the display comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button T(컄page 210).
REST in the display goes out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off
앫when the ignition is switched on
앫after about 30 minutes
앫if the battery voltage drops
Rear air conditioning
1Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3Thumbwheel for air volume control for
right rear center air vent
4Temperature rocker switch, right
5Display
6Temperature rocker switch, left
7Thumbwheel for air volume control for
left rear center air vent
!
If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air con-
ditioning is losing refrigerant. The com-
pressor has turned itself off.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i
How long the system will provide heat-
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
tion control setting.
220
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control*
Display
1Temperature, left
2Temperature, right
Basic settings
We recommend setting the temperature
on both the left- and right-hand sides to
72°F (22°C). This ensures a pleasant tem-
perature in the rear of the vehicle.
The temperatures for the left- and
right-hand sides can be set using tempera-
ture rocker switches 4 and 6.
Adjusting the rear settings with the
front control panel
Display
왘Press the ™ button (컄page 210)
or 5 (컄page 211).
The display switches over.
The temperature for the rear left- and
right-hand sides of the vehicle can be set
with temperature rocker switches 4
and 6.
The temperature display disappears ap-
proximately five seconds after the last
SmartKey confirmation and switches back
to the normal display.
i
The normal display will appear when
the ™ button or the button 5 is
pressed again.
221
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all of the side
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
1Rear window override switch
(컄page 84)
2Right front window
3Right rear window
4Left rear window
5Left front window
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be im-
mediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The door windows are equipped with the ex-
press-close and automatic reversal func-
tion. If the window encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circum-
stance where you pulled the switch past the
resistance point and released it to close the
window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey,
by pressing and holding the lock button (ve-
hicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door han-
dle, or by pressing and holding the air
recirculation button O on the climate
control, the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
222
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Opening the windows
왘Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘Press switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
tance point and release.
The corresponding window opens com-
pletely.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
tance point and release.
The corresponding window closes com-
pletely.
i
You can also open or close the win-
dows using the SmartKey, see “Sum-
mer opening feature” (컄page 223) and
“Convenience closing feature”
(컄page 224).
You can close and reopen the windows
using the air recirculation button O
in the control panel of the climate con-
trol (컄page 198) or (컄page 210).
i
Operating the windows from the rear is
not possible if you activate the override
switch (컄page 84).
i
With the SmartKey in starter switch po-
sition 0 or removed from the starter
switch, the power windows can be op-
erated:
앫until you open the driver’s or front
passenger’s door
앫for at least five minutes.
Warning G
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
erate.
223
Controls in detail
Power windows
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
Stopping windows during Express-op-
eration
왘Press or pull the respective power win-
dow switch again.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be synchronized
앫after the battery has been disconnect-
ed
앫if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Synchronizing
왘Close all doors.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 until the side win-
dows are completely closed.
왘Hold on to switches 2 to 5 for ap-
proximately one second.
The power windows are synchronized.
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
neously:
앫opening the side windows
앫opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
앫turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
Warning! G
Driver’s door only:
If within five seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not operate.
!
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing proce-
dure, the window will stop and open
slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the re-
spective power window switch again
past the resistance point and release.
If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, pull and hold
the respective power window switch.
The side window will then close without
the obstruction sensor function.
i
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat is automatically set to the highest
level if activated via summer opening
feature.
224
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
ity to the door handle.
왘Press and hold button Œ until the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
have reached the desired position.
왘Release button Œ to interrupt proce-
dure.
Convenience closing feature
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
simultaneously.
왘Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄page 224). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
in close proximity to the door handle.
왘Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
are completely closed.
왘Release button ‹ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Press and hold button ‹ or the lock
button at the outside door handle
(컄page 60) until the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely
closed.
왘Release button ‹ or the lock button
at the outside door handle to interrupt
procedure.
Warning! G
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof*, be sure that there is no danger
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
cedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
lows:
앫Release button ‹. To reverse in di-
rection of movement, press
button Œ for opening or button ‹
for closing.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof* will open for as long as the
door handle is held but the door not
opened.
225
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
왔Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/ sliding sunroof is on the overhead
control panel.
1Push back to slide roof open
2Push forward to slide roof closed
3Push up to raise roof at rear
4Pull down to lower roof at rear
With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning! G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and re-
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
tion.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop-
erly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compart-
ment. 컄컄
226
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
왘To open, close, raise or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the re-
quired direction 1to 4.
Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
Fully opening (Express-open) and
closing (Express-close) the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
왘To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, move the sunroof switch past the
resistance point in the direction of
arrow 1to 2 and release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the tilt/ sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened or
closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄page 407).
i
You can also open or close the win-
dows using the SmartKey, see “Sum-
mer opening feature” (컄page 223) and
“Convenience closing feature”
(컄page 224).
You can also close and reopen the
tilt/sliding sunroof using
앫the air recirculation switch O in
the control panel of the climate
control (컄page 198)
or (컄page 210)
컄컄
227
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
왘Move the sunroof switch in any direc-
tion.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro-
nized
앫after the battery has been disconnect-
ed or discharged
앫after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄page 407)
앫after a malfunction
앫if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not
open smoothly
왘Remove the fuse from the main fuse
box (컄page 434).
왘Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Move and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
direction of arrow 3 for approximately
one second.
왘Check the Express-open feature
(컄page 226).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other-
wise repeat the above steps.
i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
roof is blocked during the
Express-close procedure, the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof will stop and reopen slight-
ly.
228
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de-
scribed on the following pages:
앫Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
앫Airmatic DC* adjusts the vehicle sus-
pension characteristics automatically
and controls the vehicle level
For information on BAS, ABS, SBC and ESP
driving systems, see “Driving safety sys-
tems” (컄page 87).
Cruise control
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed above 25 mph
(40 km /h).
E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC:
You can set or resume cruise control at any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄page 22).
Warning! G
Cruise control is a convenience system de-
signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
eration. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Cancel cruise control
4Resume at previously set speed
Setting current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
The selected speed appears in the multi-
function display for approximately five sec-
onds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
E 320, E 500:
On downhill grades, the cruise control
will hold the set speed with active brak-
ing action.
In addition, on longer downhill grades
the automatic transmission will auto-
matically downshift.
E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC:
If the engine’s braking power does not
brake the vehicle sufficiently on down-
hill grades, the automatic transmission
will automatically downshift.
230
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘Step on the brake pedal.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
or
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
i
Cruise control automatically switched
off, if
E 320, E 500:
앫you step on the brake pedal.
앫you depress the parking brake ped-
al.
In this case the segments in the
multifunction display go out and no
warning sounds.
앫the vehicle speed is under 25 mph
(40 km/h).
앫ESP is in operation or switched off
with the ESP switch (컄page 92).
앫you move the gear selector lever in
position N while driving.
The segments in the multifunction dis-
play go out, and an acoustic warning
sounds.
E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC:
앫you step on the brake pedal.
앫you move the gear selector lever to
position N while driving.
앫the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
앫ESP is in operation.
The segments in the multifunction dis-
play are flashing.
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘Lift cruise control lever to position 1
and hold it up until the desired speed is
reached.
왘Release cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Setting a lower speed
왘Depress cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘Release cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
rection of arrow 1.
Slower
왘Briefly tip cruise control lever in the di-
rection of arrow 2.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
왘Briefly push cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control resume the last set
speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multi-
function display for approximately five sec-
onds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
i
E 320, E 500:
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brake system will au-
tomatically brake the vehicle if the en-
gine’s braking power does not brake
the vehicle sufficiently.
E 320 4MATIC, E 500 4MATIC:
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
cle sufficiently.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
ous injury to you and others.
232
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
앫If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄page 236).
Warning! G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
and to provide the steering, braking and oth-
er driving inputs necessary to retain control
of the vehicle.
Warning! G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it
is not intended to, nor does it, replace the
need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
hicle ahead, including most importantly
brake operation to assure safe stopping dis-
tance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
ditions into account.
Warning! G
Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
mend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Warning! G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning! G
Close attention to road and traffic condi-
tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
tance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning! G
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
234
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
1Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg-
ments come on around the set speed.
1Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments from the speed of the
vehicle ahead to the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ger of collision:
앫The DTR warning lamp l in the in-
strument cluster comes on red.
앫An intermittent warning sounds.
왘Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the follow-
ing warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red DTR warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again estab-
lished.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the cur-
rent settings for Distronic. What appears in
the display depends on whether Distronic
and the distance warning function are
turned on or off.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following dis-
plays.
Warning! G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
DTR warning lamp l in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indi-
cate that Distronic will not be capable of
slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final cau-
tion that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact be-
ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
Warning! G
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-
mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/ s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to about 20% of the maxi-
mum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
236
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated
If Distronic is deactivated you can see the
standard display of Distronic in the multi-
function display.
1Vehicle ahead, if detected
2Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4Your vehicle
5Symbol for activated distance warning
function
Distronic activated
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
speed in the multifunction display for
about five seconds. If Distronic is
activated, you can see the following dis-
play in the multifunction display.
1Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Deactivate Distronic
4Resume at previously set speed
237
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
You can activate Distronic if:
앫you are driving between 25 mph
(40km/h) and 110mph (180km/h)
앫the ESP is activated (컄page 89)
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message
---
in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫Up to two minutes after starting the en-
gine
앫When you brake
앫If you have set the parking brake
앫If the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
앫If the ESP is switched off
Setting the current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Setting a higher speed
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄page 236) to
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄page 236), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
(컄page 234).
i
If you do not take your foot off the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunc-
tion display:
Distronic override
. The distance to a
slower moving vehicles in front of you
will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accel-
erator pedal position.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
celeration (e.g. for passing), cruise con-
trol will resume the last speed set.
238
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄page 236) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄page 236), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on in the speedometer
(컄page 234).
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄page 236).
Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄page 236).
Distronic is activated and set to the last
stored speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will
automatically downshift if the rate of
deceleration is too low.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
ous injury to you and others.
239
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄page 236).
or
왘Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored in memory.
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
앫you set the parking brake
앫you drive slower than 25 mph
(40 km/h)
앫the ESP is active (컄page 89) or you de-
activate the ESP
앫you move the transmission selector le-
ver into position N
A signal will sound. The
Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following dis-
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehi-
cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time set-
ting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approxi-
mately five seconds:
Distronic off
.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
Warning! G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the sys-
tem. At that time the driver must apply the
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur-
ther or bring it to a stop.
Warning! G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recom-
mendations for safe following distance.
240
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Distance warning function on/off
switch
2Control lamp
3Thumbwheel for setting distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®.
Distance warning function
When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
tion will continue to warn you when recog-
nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
앫The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫An intermittent warning sounds.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
ing sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp also extinguishes.
Warning! G
If the DTR warning lamp l in the instru-
ment cluster comes on while driving and/or
an intermittent warning sounds, immediate
attention on the part of the driver is re-
quired. As required by the traffic situation,
apply the brakes and navigate around a pos-
sible obstacle. However, do not drive by re-
lying on the distance warning function, as
this will result in an emergency braking ap-
plication. Especially depending on road sur-
face conditions and driver reaction, this will
not always enable you to avoid a collision.
i
Complex driving situations are not al-
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.
241
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating
왘Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 on the button comes
on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display (컄page 236).
Deactivating
왘Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 on the button goes
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
the multifunction display.
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is re-
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
pared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Warning! G
Distronic works to maintain the speed se-
lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes
앫While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫A stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫A disabled vehicle
앫An oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
serve all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning! G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
242
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
Currently unavailable See Operator’s
Manual
appears in the multifunction
display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄page 347).
Turns and bends
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
i
If the message
Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
disappears
during driving and the last speed stored
flashes for approximately five seconds,
the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved;
Distronic works again.
243
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane changing
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
traveling near the edge of the roadway has
not yet been detected by Distronic. There
will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
244
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)*
Airmatic automatically selects the opti-
mum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two
components:
앫Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
앫Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the opti-
mum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspen-
sion is set to either sporty or comfort.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫Your driving style
앫Road surface conditions
앫Your choice of suspension style,
“sporty I”, “sporty II” or “comfortable”,
which you select using the damping
button.
The following suspension styles are
available:
앫Comfortable
Both indicator lamps 2 are off.
앫Sporty I
One indicator lamp 2 is on.
앫Sporty II
Both indicator lamps 2 are on.
1Damping button
2Indicator lamps
왘Start the engine.
왘Press the damping button 1 until the
desired suspension style is set.
i
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.
i
In the sporty suspension style the vehi-
cle is lowered up to 0.6 in (15 mm).
245
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to
앫reduce fuel consumption
앫increase vehicle safety
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
can be selected:
앫Normal
앫Raised
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫At a speed approximately above
68 mph (110 km/h) and the sporty
suspension style selected
(컄page 244), ride height is reduced
automatically by up to approximately
0.6in (15mm).
앫With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the “Normal” level.
Select the “Raised” level only when re-
quired by current driving conditions. Oth-
erwise
앫fuel consumption may increase
앫handling may be impaired
i
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.
246
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
The button is located in the lower section
of the center console.
1Vehicle level control button
2Indicator lamp
왘Briefly press button 1 to change from
“Normal” level to “Raised” level. When
vehicle is at “Raised” level, pressing
the switch will return the vehicle to
“Normal” level.
Vehicle level when
stationary
Use for Ride height increase
over normal
Automatic lowering Indicator lamp (컄page 246)
Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Lamp off
Raised Driving with snow
chains or very
rough road sur-
face conditions
Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Lamp on
i
At a speed of approximately above
75 mph (120 km /h) or if the speed
amounts to between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h)
for approximately five minutes, the set-
ting “Raised” is canceled. The message
Leveling cancelled
appears in the
multifunction display.
If you do not drive in this speed range,
the “Raised” level remains stored even
if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch.
247
Controls in detail
Loading
왔Loading
Split rear bench seat
To expand the cargo compartment, you
can fold down the left and right rear seat
backrests.
The two sections can be folded down sep-
arately to enlarge the cargo compartment.
Folding the backrest forward
1Release catch
2Seat cushion
왘Pull release catch 1 and use it to pull
seat cushion 2 up.
1Release catch
2Seat backrest
왘Pull release catch 1 up.
The seat backrest is released and the
head restraints fold back.
왘Fold the seat backrest 2 forward.
Warning! G
When expanding the cargo compartment, al-
ways fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
rests must remain properly locked in the up-
right position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄page 251).
!
You must always release the seat cush-
ion and fold it up before folding the seat
backrests forward. The upholstery on
the backrest may otherwise be dam-
aged.
i
If tall persons have occupied the
driver’s and front passenger seats, it
may be necessary to move these seats
forward slightly in order to fold the rear
seat backrests forward.
248
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning seat backrest to original po-
sition
1Seat cushion
2Seat backrest
왘Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until
it engages.
왘Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and
press down from the rear of the cush-
ion until it audibly engages.
왘Swing the head restraint forward by
hand until it engages.
i
If the rear center seat is to be occupied
while driving, it may be necessary to
fold the seat belt buckle up again.
Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
tended cargo compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
249
Controls in detail
Loading
Adjusting seat backrest position
1Release catch
2Seat backrest
왘Pull right seat release catch 1 up and
fold seat backrest forward.
왘With the seat backrest released, pull
release catch 1 up again.
왘Pull left seat release catch 1 up and
fold seat backrest forward.
왘With the seat backrest released, pull
release catch 1 up again.
왘Fold left seat backrest to the rear until
it engages.
왘Fold right seat backrest to the rear until
it engages.
The seat backrests are now in the alter-
native position.
Expanding the cargo compartment
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro-
vide you with a larger, flat cargo compart-
ment.
왘Fold the seat cushions forward
(컄page 247).
1Release lever
왘Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
왘Remove the head restraints
(컄page 129).
i
The seat backrests can be placed in an
alternative upright position. This cre-
ates a larger cargo compartment area
or provides for improved seating com-
fort on the folding bench seat, if re-
quired.
250
Controls in detail
Loading
왘Fold the seat backrest forward
(컄page 247).
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
ceed the load limit or vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the corresponding
placard which can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
fluences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
!
Leave the seat cushion hinge in this po-
sition. The upholstery could be dam-
aged if you fold the hinge back.
251
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings
Four rings 1 are located in the cargo com-
partment.
왘Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄page 250).
Rear seat
There is a cargo tie-down ring located on
each side of the footwell under the rear
seat.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
go in the cargo compartment if possible. Do
not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backs.
Never drive vehicle with tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
sciousness and death.
252
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo management system*
(Canada only)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo
management system and accompanying
accessories which enables you to utilize
your cargo compartment in a variety of
ways. You can store the cargo manage-
ment system in the pouch that comes with
the vehicle.
1Cargo rails
Inserting the mounting elements into
the cargo rails
1Cargo rail
2Mounting element
You can move the mounting element to
various engaging points on the cargo rail
and fix it in place.
These engaging points are located
2 inches apart from one another on the
cargo rail and are indicated by markings.
i
The pouch and telescoping rod can be
placed in the storage box in the cargo
compartment.
253
Controls in detail
Loading
왘Turn mounting element 2 to L.
왘Insert mounting element 2 in cargo
rail 1.
왘Turn mounting element 2 until it en-
gages in the ‹ position.
You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the
mounting element
1Cargo tie-down ring
2Mounting element
왘Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
rail to N.
왘Insert cargo tie-down ring 1 into
mounting element 2.
왘Turn mounting element 2 until it en-
gages in the ‹ position.
You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
i
You can turn the mounting element in
the cargo rail to four positions:
‹To lock the mounting element.
NTo insert or remove the cargo
tie-down ring, the belt reel or
the telescoping rod.
LTo insert or remove the mount-
ing element.
STo move the mounting element
to the next engaging point.
Warning! G
The cargo tie-down rings should be subject
to equal loads. Make sure to comply with
the information provided in the loading in-
structions (컄page 250).
254
Controls in detail
Loading
Belt reel
1Belt reel
2Mounting element
3Locking button
왘Insert two mounting elements 2 into a
cargo rail.
왘Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
rail to N.
왘Insert belt reel 1 into mounting ele-
ment 2.
왘Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
rail until it engages in the ‹ posi-
tion.
You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
왘Press locking button 3 on the belt reel
and pull cargo net out in direction of ar-
row.
왘Place load between the cargo net and
the side wall of the cargo compart-
ment.
왘Press locking button 3 on belt reel.
With the other hand, slowly pull net
over load until it is taut.
Telescoping rod
1Telescoping rod
2Mounting element
i
The belt reel can be used to tighten
light-weight loads against the side wall
of the cargo compartment, thus secur-
ing them from slipping.
i
The telescoping rod can be used to
tighten the load against the rear seats
so as to secure it from slipping.
255
Controls in detail
Loading
왘Insert one mounting element 2 into
each cargo rail.
왘Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail
to N.
왘Insert telescoping rod 1 into mount-
ing element 2.
왘Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail
until it engages in the ‹ position.
You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
Storage box in cargo compartment
(Canada only)
1Storage box
Warning! G
When you are using the storage box in the
cargo compartment, the backrests of the
seats in front of it must be completely en-
gaged to the rear, and the twin roller blind
must be installed.
Do not exceed the storage box’s maximum
load of 44 lbs (20 kg), as it could otherwise
become detached during an accident or
sharp braking maneuvers, and could injure
you or other passengers.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
256
Controls in detail
Loading
Installing the storage box
왘Fold rear seat backrests forward
(컄page 247).
왘Insert storage box from behind into
cargo compartment with the opening
pointing in the direction of travel.
왘Press locking hooks of storage box into
the space between the rear seat back-
rest and the cargo compartment.
왘Fold rear seat backrest to the rear
(컄page 248).
Loading the storage box
왘Fold rear seat backrests forward
(컄page 247).
왘Fill storage box with cargo through the
opening on the front side.
왘Fold rear seat backrest to the rear
(컄page 248).
Removing the storage box
왘Fold rear seat backrests forward
(컄page 247).
왘Slide locking hooks of storage box for-
ward out of the retainers.
왘Pull storage box to the rear and remove
it from cargo compartment.
왘Fold rear seat backrest to the rear
(컄page 248).
Twin roller blind
The twin roller blind contains a cargo net
and a luggage cargo compartment.
It is located on the seat backrest of the
rear bench seat.
Cargo net
i
The storage box is additionally held in
place from above by the twin roller
blind.
i
The storage box in the cargo compart-
ment is covered by the rear bench seat
and can hold a maximum of 44 lbs
(20 kg) cargo.
Warning! G
The cargo net cannot hold back heavy loads.
The transported load should therefore al-
ways be tied down.
Objects which are insufficiently secured
could otherwise injure you if they are thrown
around in the event of an accident, during
hard braking or steering maneuvers.
257
Controls in detail
Loading
1Cargo net
2Mountings for cargo net
왘Pull cargo net 1 up and hook it onto
mountings 2.
Cargo compartment cover
The cargo compartment cover unlocks
automatically while the tailgate is open-
ing/closing and is automatically raised/
lowered.
It is therefore unnecessary to roll up the
cargo compartment cover before loading
and unloading.
1Cargo compartment cover
Rolling up the cargo compartment cover
왘Unhook cargo compartment cover
from its anchorages on the left and
right sides.
왘Slowly guide cargo compartment cover
back until it stops.
i
You can use the cargo net even when
the rear seat backrest is folded for-
ward. The cargo net should then be
hooked onto the front mountings.
!
When loading the vehicle, make sure
not to load the cargo compartment
over the lower edge of the side win-
dows.
The twin roller blind could otherwise be
damaged when the tailgate is being
closed.
258
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing the twin roller blind
왘Roll up cargo net and cargo compart-
ment cover.
왘Fold both rear seat cushions forward
(컄page 247).
왘Push twin roller blind to the left out of
its anchorage on the rear seat backrest
and remove it.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔Useful features
Storage compartments Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Glove box
1Glove box lid release
2Compartment for mobile
phone/glasses
Opening the glove box
왘Push lid release 1.
The glove box lid opens downward.
Closing the glove box
왘Push lid up to close.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
around and injuring vehicle occupants dur-
ing an accident. Warning! G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
260
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the center
console (no CD changer* installed)
1Opening/closing button
왘Press button 1 to open.
The control panel swings out upward
and the storage compartment extends
out.
왘Press button 1 to close.
Storage space under center armrest
(Vehicles with cup holder in the center
console)
1Storage compartment
2Storage tray
Opening storage tray
왘Pull handle 2.
Opening storage compartment
왘Pull handle 1.
i
Prior to closing the glove box, close the
compartment for glasses first.
i
Never place any medications in the
storage compartment. If there is a pow-
er failure, the storage compartment
cannot be opened.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the rear cen-
ter console
왘Briefly press the top of the compart-
ment.
It extends automatically.
Ruffled storage bags
Ruffled storage bags are located on the
back of the front seats.
Storage compartment in the rear arm-
rest
왘Press the handle upward and fold the
armrest up.
Warning! G
The ruffled storage bag is intended for stor-
ing light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
ruffled storage bag.
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an acci-
dent.
262
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with cup holders in either
the center console (컄page 262) or in the
center armrest (컄page 263).
Cup holder in the center console
왘Briefly press the marking in the back of
the cover.
The cover opens.
왘Briefly press marking on the cup hold-
er.
The cup holder extends automatically.
Warning! G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants, only use containers that
fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open con-
tainers and do not fill containers to a height
where the contents, especially hot liquids,
could spill during braking, vehicle maneu-
vers, or in an accident.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Ob-
jects thrown around in the vehicle interior
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
sonal injury.
i
The cup holder can be removed for
cleaning. Clean the cup holder only
with clear, lukewarm water. Make sure
to insert the cup holder in the guides
when reinstalling it.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
1Left cup holder
2Right cup holder
Removing cup holder
왘Take out the cup holder.
Using two fingers in the horizontal slot
at the upper rear side of the cup holder,
lift cup holder upwards to remove.
Storage compartment with cup holder
in the center armrest
The storage compartment in the center
armrest contains a removable dual cup
holder.
Opening storage compartment
1Cover
왘Slide cover 1 in direction of arrow 2.
Cup holder in the center armrest
3Dual cup holder
4Telephone* compartment
Closing storage compartment
왘Slide cover 1 back.
i
The cup holder can be removed to in-
crease storage space and for cleaning.
Clean the cup holder only with clear,
lukewarm water.
Make sure to insert the cup holder in
the guides when reinstalling it
(컄page 264).
264
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing cup holder
1Cup holder
2Locking pins
왘Move both locking pins 2 in direction
of arrow.
왘Take cup holder out upward.
Reinstalling cup holder
3Locking pins
왘Insert cup holder.
왘Move both locking pins 3 in direction
of arrow.
Rear cup holder
왘Briefly press the front of the armrest.
The cup holder extends automatically.
265
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Opening ashtray
왘Briefly press the marking on the bot-
tom of cover 1.
The cover opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Secure vehicle from movement by set-
ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold.
왘Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘Install insert by pushing it back into
frame until it engages again.
Rear seat ashtray
Opening rear seat ashtray
왘Briefly press the top of the ashtray.
The cover opens automatically.
Warning! G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
266
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
The cigarette lighter is located in the
center console compartment in front of the
center armrest (컄page 28).
1Cigarette lighter
왘Switch on the ignition.
왘Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
12-V socket*
The socket is located in the rear of the cen-
ter console storage compartment.
The socket can be used for accessories up
to a maximum of 180 W.
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
i
The lighter socket can be used to ac-
commodate electrical accessories up
to a maximum 85 W.
i
An additional socket is located on the
left side in the cargo compartment.
267
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
1Indicator lamp
2Switching off
3Switching on
Switching on
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the di-
rection of arrow 3.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 1 comes on.
Switching off
왘Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the di-
rection of arrow 2.
The heated steering wheel is turned off.
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
For information on steering wheel, see
“Multifunction steering wheel”
(컄page 154).
i
The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically while indicator lamp 1
remains on when
앫the temperature of the vehicle inte-
rior is above 86°F (30°C)
앫the temperature of the steering
wheel is above 82°F (28°C)
Indicator lamp 1 flashes or switches
off
앫in case of power surge or undervolt-
age
앫in case of a steering wheel heating
malfunction
268
Controls in detail
Useful features
Floormats
1Retainer pin
2Eyelet
Removing
왘Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
왘Remove the floormat.
Installing
왘Lay down the floormat.
왘Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
tainer pins 1.
Telephone*
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
i
To install or remove the floormat more
easily, move the driver’s seat or front
passenger seat as far to the rear as
possible (컄page 39).
Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
essary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
269
Controls in detail
Useful features
You can take and place telephone calls us-
ing the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele-
phone functions, use the control system
(컄page 179).
See separate operating manual for instruc-
tions on how to use the telephone.
Tele Aid*
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his /her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
agement and Data System) if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1Observe all legal requirements.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km /h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
tem may only be performed by com-
pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using
the ¡button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a sys-
tem that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding ac-
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
270
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
mand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫automatic and manual emergency
앫Roadside Assistance and
앫information
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
lular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button çor use the volume knob
on your COMAND headunit.
왘To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your ac-
quaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
System self-check
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal-
functions are detected and indicated (the
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than ten seconds or do not come on). The
message
TELE AID malfunction – Drive
to workshop
appears for approximately
ten seconds in the multifunction display.
i
The SOS button is located above the in-
terior rear view mirror.
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cov-
er.
i
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
271
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
ly following an accident in which the emer-
gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air
bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄page 272) for instruc-
tions on initiating an emergency call man-
ually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message
Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display. When
the connection is established, the mes-
sage
Call connected
appears in the multi-
function display. All information relevant to
the emergency, such as the location of the
vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite lo-
cation system), vehicle model, identifica-
tion number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to deter-
mine more precisely the nature of the acci-
dent provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message
TELE AID malfunction – Drive to
workshop
is displayed in the multifunction
display after the system self-check, a mal-
function in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as ex-
pected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
272
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫it has been activated and is operation-
al. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
Initiating an emergency call manually
1Cover
2SOS button
왘Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘Close cover after the emergency call is
concluded.
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
Response Center.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
The message
Call failed
appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
ten seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
273
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting
call
will appear in the multifunction
display and the audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message
Call connected
appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man-
ual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫Sign and Drive services: Services such
as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
hicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants.
274
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located be-
low the center armrest cover.
왘Press and hold button (for longer than
two seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
ter will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message
Connecting call
will appear
in the multifunction display and the
audio system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
message
Call connected
appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. When a voice connection is estab-
lished. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp on the Roadside As-
sistance button • remains illumi-
nated in red for approximately
ten seconds during the system
self-check after switching on ignition
(together with the SOS button and the
Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄page 270)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • is flashing con-
tinuously and there was no voice con-
nection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message
Call failed
appears in the
multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter-
minated using the tbutton on the
multifunction steering wheel or the re-
spective button for ending a telephone
call on the COMAND headunit.
i
The indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approximately ten seconds during
the system self-check after switching
on ignition (together with the SOS but-
ton and the Roadside Assistance
button •).
275
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade scenario
An emergency call is possible even if other
services are active.
See system self-check (컄page 270)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than ap-
proximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously
and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not avail-
able). The message
Call failed
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated us-
ing the tbutton on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or the respective
button for ending a telephone call on
the COMAND headunit.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flash-
ing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently ac-
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and have the system checked or con-
tact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is conclud-
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assis-
tance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button t on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel or the respective
button for ending a telephone call on
the COMAND headunit.
276
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your pass-
word which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘Then return to your vehicle and pull the
tailgate recessed handle for a minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message
Call connected
appears
in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
!
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
i
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted
and the selected mode (radio or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The COMAND navigation*
system (if engaged) will continue to
run. The display in the instrument clus-
ter is available for use, and spoken
commands are only available by press-
ing the RPT button on the COMAND
unit. A pop-up window will appear in
the COMAND display to indicate that a
Tele Aid call is in progress.
277
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered inci-
dent report.
왘Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo-
cated, the Response Center will con-
tact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be pro-
vided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
123 Signal transmitter button
4Indicator lamp
5Hand-held transmitter button
6Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
i
The remote door unlock feature is avail-
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
work is available.
The SOS button will flash and the mes-
sage
Call connected
will appear in the
multifunction display to indicate re-
ceipt of the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
sponse Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the ve-
hicle occupants.
If the tailgate recessed handle was
pulled for more than 20 seconds be-
fore door unlock authorization was re-
ceived by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the tailgate recessed handle again. i
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, call is initiated automati-
cally to the Response Center. See an-
ti-theft alarm system (컄page 98) and
tow-away alarm (컄page 99).
278
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning! G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
erator, make sure that people and objects
are out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When program-
ming a garage door opener, the door moves
up or down. When programming a gate oper-
ator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
ty stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience diffi-
culties with programming the transmit-
ter, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
279
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming or reprogramming the in-
tegrated remote control
Step 1:
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
Step 2:
왘If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 1 and 3 and release
them only when the indicator lamp 4
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
Step 3:
왘Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control locat-
ed on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 4 in view.
Step 4:
왘Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 4 on the integrat-
ed remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
컄컄
280
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 5:
왘When the indicator lamp 4 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 6:
왘Press and hold the just-trained inte-
grated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 4.
If the indicator lamp 4 stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
Step 7:
왘To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
ture, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “train-
ing” button may also be referred to as
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is dif-
ficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener opera-
tor’s manual.
i
The indicator lamp 4 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 sec-
onds.
i
If the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with pro-
gramming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
컄컄
281
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 9:
왘Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing step.
Step 10:
왘Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3).
Step 11:
왘Press, hold for two seconds and re-
lease same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Step 12:
왘Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (1, 2
or 3).
Step 13:
왘To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the inte-
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-
nal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having dif-
ficulties programming a gate operator (re-
gardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘Continue to press and hold the inte-
grated signal transmitter button (1,
2 or 3) while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote con-
trol transmitter 6 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 4 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
왘Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
282
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button (1,
2 or 3) to activate the remote con-
trolled device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 1 and 3, for ap-
proximately 20 seconds, until the indi-
cator lamp 4 blinks rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
Reprogramming a single integrated
signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal trans-
mitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘Press and hold the desired signal trans-
mitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not re-
lease the button.
왘The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
283
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
284
Operation
In the “Operation” section you will find de-
tailed information on operating, maintain-
ing and caring for your vehicle.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satis-
fied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive en-
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
앫Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.
앫Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄page 188) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
All of the above, as may apply to your vehi-
cle type, also apply when driving the first
1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or
the rear differential has been replaced.
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
cles:
앫During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
285
Operation
Driving instructions
왔Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-
ditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tion pressures.
앫Remove unnecessary loads.
앫Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration.
앫Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
Drinking and driving Pedals
Warning! G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning! G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
jects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
286
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance Brakes
Warning! G
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake sys-
tem operation and switch it into its emer-
gency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄page 354) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄page 362) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
press the pedal much further to obtain the
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may
only be applied to the front wheels. Stop-
ping distance is increased!
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir-
cumstances do not permit the use of the
recommended towing methods and the ve-
hicle requires towing with all four wheels on
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
more information, refer to “Towing the vehi-
cle” (컄page 430). For more information,
see “SBC brake system” (컄page 92).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
hicle.
Warning! G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through wa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
287
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
ter stays on, there is a malfunction in the
SBC brake system (컄page 92) or the
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
ervoir.
Have the brake system inspected by quali-
fied technicians immediately. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄page 89).
Warning! G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄page 375).
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and re-
duces brake pad wear.
288
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Parking
Tires
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re-
duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
!
Set the parking brake whenever park-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always set the
parking brake and turn front wheel
against road curb.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the selector lever to position P.
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
289
Operation
Driving instructions
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which p oint the
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
pairs.
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be-
come visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1/8in (3 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
290
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to make sure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-
propriate caution.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
ing conditions.
Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
291
Operation
Driving instructions
E 320, E 320 4MATIC, E 5001,
E 500 4MATIC,
E 320 (Appearance Package*)
E 320 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
E 500 (Appearance Package*)
E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*),
E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
E 320 (Sport Package*)
E500
1 (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of above 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
rective steering action.
1Not available in the U.S.
i
For information on speed ratings for
winter tires, see “Winter driving”
(컄page 337).
For additional general information on
tire speed markings on tire sidewall,
see “Tire speed rating” (컄page 335).
i
For more information on driving with
snow chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄page 338).
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss.
292
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
ter driving is resumed.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄page 337).
Standing water
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking ma-
neuvers.
Warning! G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
ment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing wa-
ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
age is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
293
Operation
Driving instructions
Passenger compartment
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio trans-
mitter
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Telephones and two-way radios
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
structions regarding use of an external an-
tenna.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
agement and Data System), radio or tele-
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km /h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
1Observe all legal requirements
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
294
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Your vehicle is equipped with monolith-
ic-type catalytic converters, an important
element in conjunction with the oxygen
sensors to achieve substantial control of
the pollutants in the exhaust emissions.
Keep your vehicle in proper operating con-
dition by following our recommended
maintenance instructions as outlined in
your Maintenance Booklet.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re-
quirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
Warning! G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
295
Operation
Driving instructions
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
gine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
riously burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
296
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking /unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks /unlocks the fuel filler flap.
왘Turn the engine off
앫by turning the SmartKey to
position 0.
앫by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driv-
er’s door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is now in
position 0, same as SmartKey re-
moved from starter switch).
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or over-
fill.
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extin-
guish all smoking materials. Never allow
sparks, flame or smoking materials near
gasoline!
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
297
Operation
At the gas station
왘Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
ened.
왘Close the fuel filler flap.
Check regularly and before a long trip
1Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
2Brake fluid
3Coolant level
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? malfunction indicator lamp
(USA only) or the ± malfunction in-
dicator lamp (Canada only) to illumi-
nate.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄page 357).
i
Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
i
Opening the hood, see (컄page 299).
298
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
For information on refilling the reservoir,
see “Windshield washer system and head-
lamp cleaning system*” (컄page 306).
Brake fluid
For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (컄page 453).
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
ble water quality). For more information on
coolant, see “Coolant level” (컄page 303)
and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(컄page 450).
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil level,
see (컄page 300).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
“Replacing bulbs” (컄page 410).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄page 141).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information on tire inflation pres-
sure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
(컄page 318).
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Noti-
fy an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately. Do not add brake fluid as
this will not solve the problem. For
more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄page 354).
299
Operation
Engine compartment
왔Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
1Hood release
왘Pull lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2
will extend out of the radiator grille.
2Handle for opening the hood
왘Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radia-
tor grille.
왘Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
the handle) and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning! G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
300
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
왘Let the hood drop from a height of ap-
proximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫the vehicle is new
앫the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫with the engine running
앫while starting the engine
앫if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Warning! G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
i
Do not use any special lubricant addi-
tives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
301
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the
control system
When checking the oil level
앫the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫with the engine at operating tempera-
ture, the vehicle must have been sta-
tionary for at least five minutes with the
engine turned off
앫with the engine not at operating tem-
perature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the multi-
function display, do the following:
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
The standard display (컄page 153) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘Press button k or j, on the
steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
Engine oil level - Measuring now!
Measurement correct only if veh.
level
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
앫
Engine oil level ok
앫
Add 1.0 Qt. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada:
1.0 Liter
)
앫
Add 1.5 Qts. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada:
1.5 Liters
)
앫
Add 2.0 Qts. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada:
2.0 Liters
)
왘If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil, see (컄page 302).
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 450) and (컄page 453).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button* is not in position 2, the following
message will appear:
Switch on ignition
to check engine oil level
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
i
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
302
Operation
Engine compartment
If you see the message:
Observe waiting period
왘If engine is at operating temperature,
wait five minutes before repeating
check procedure.
왘If engine is not at operating tempera-
ture, wait 30 minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when engine on
왘Turn off the engine.
왘If engine is at operating temperature,
wait five minutes before checking oil.
왘If engine is not at operating tempera-
ture, wait 30 minutes before checking
oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
왘Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
More information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil can be found
in the “Practical hints” section
(컄page 362).
Adding engine oil
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a
listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet in your ve-
hicle literature portfolio, or contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of spec-
ification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
303
Operation
Engine compartment
1Filler cap
왘Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
왘Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 450) and (컄page 453).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compart-
ment.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
304
Operation
Engine compartment
1Coolant expansion tank
왘Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure.
왘Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level:
앫for cold coolant: reaches the black
top part of the reservoir
앫for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘Add coolant as required.
왘Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄page 455).
Warning! G
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
앫Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
305
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-
ies:
앫Auxiliary battery (located in the engine
compartment).
앫Main battery (starter and electrical
consumers; located in the cargo com-
partment).
These batteries should always be suffi-
ciently charged in order to achieve their
rated service life. Refer to Maintenance
Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
tery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing batteries, always use bat-
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
GObserve all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
ARisk of explosion.
DKeep flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
BBattery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clean
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
EWear eye protection.
CKeep children away.
FFollow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
306
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
1Washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of:
앫Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
system: approximately 4.8 US qt
(4.5 l).
앫Vehicles with headlamp cleaning sys-
tem: approximately 7.4 US qt (7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could re-
sult in damage to the washer sys-
tem/reservoir.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄page 458).
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
id can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Warning! G
Washer solvent /antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
307
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommend-
ed rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice con-
cerning tire service and purchase.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the
vehicle when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged
앫The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
anteed
Warning! G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
308
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more informa-
tion on checking tire inflation pressure see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(컄page 316).
Tire inspection
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫excessive treadwear (컄page 309)
앫cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫Driving style
앫Tire inflation pressure
앫Distance driven
Warning! G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Warning! G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
309
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1⁄8in (3 mm).
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫Summer tires 1/8in (3 mm)
앫Winter tires 1/6in (4 mm)
1TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
Cleaning tires
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply re-
duced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
310
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advan-
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
앫The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
Information placard (Example B) can be
found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This
placard tells you important information
about the number of people that can be
in the vehicle and the total weight that
can be carried in the vehicle. It also
contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment
tires on your vehicle.
앫The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
i
Spare wheels may be mounted against
the direction of rotation (spinning) even
with a unidirectional tire for temporary
use only until the regular drive wheel
has been repaired or replaced. Always
observe and follow applicable tempo-
rary use restrictions and speed limita-
tions indicated on the spare wheel.
311
Operation
Tires and wheels
1Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your vehi-
cle.
Tire and Loading Information
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).
Placard (Example A)
1Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Load lim-
it data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illus-
trations below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
312
Operation
Tires and wheels
The placard showing the load limit informa-
tion is located on the driver's door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Example A),
locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on this placard. The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced in that
statement.
Placard (Example B)
1Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit informa-
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A or
placard Example B located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄page 311).
Placard (Example A)
1Seating capacity
i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Seating
data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illus-
trations below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
313
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
1Seating capacity
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
왘Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)
왘Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
Step 4
왘The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
Step 5
왘Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄page 315).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄page 311).
314
Operation
Tires and wheels
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄page 315).
Example Combined
weight limit
of occu-
pants and
cargo from
placard
Number of
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Seating
configura-
tion
Occupants weight Combined
weight of all
occupants
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (total load limit or
vehicle capacity weight from plac-
ard minus combined weight of all
occupants)
11500 lbs 5front: 2
rear: 3
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
21500 lbs 3front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
31500 lbs 1front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
315
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄page 315) as to not exceed the permis-
sible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification
label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄page 440).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄page 315) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-
tal allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
ceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-
plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
tant weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
percent of the trailer weight and every-
thing loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
316
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄page 311).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be ad-
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄page 317).
Placard (Example A)
1Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommend-
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/ or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc. i
Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Tire data
are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the illustra-
tions below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
317
Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)
1Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommend-
ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-
mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in-
flation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
cle condition. If such information is provid-
ed, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
i
Placard (Example B) may list
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for different vehicle loads.
Warning! G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
앫Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
318
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or
driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than three hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire in-
flation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄page 316). If necessary, add air to
achieve the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
왘Install the valve cap.
왘Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Checking tire inflation pressure elec-
tronically*
The tire pressure monitoring system* only
functions on wheels that are equipped with
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is-
sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
in one or more of the tires.
You can call up the tire pressure monitor-
ing display using the control system
(컄page 167).
i
If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
pressure with the tire gauge.
i
After you have reactivated the tire
pressure monitoring system*, the cur-
rent tire inflation pressures will only be
shown after a few minutes’ driving
time.
During this time, you will see the follow-
ing message in the display:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few mins.
319
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
왘Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu ap-
pears in the multifunction display
(컄page 158).
왘Press the j or k button until the
current inflation pressures for each tire
appear in the multifunction display.
i
Possible differences between the read-
ings of a tire inflation pressure gauge of
an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment,
and the vehicle’s control system can
occur. The readings issued by the con-
trol system are more precise.
Warning! G
When the tire pressure monitoring system*
warning light is lit, one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. You should
stop and check your tires as soon as possi-
ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
spare, should be checked monthly when
cold and set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the vehicle placard
and Operator’s Manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pres-
sures for your vehicle can be found on
the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar
or the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in
the Operator’s Manual.
Warning! G
The tire pressure monitoring system* does
not indicate a warning for wrongly selected
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire infla-
tion pressure according to the placard of the
driver’s door B-pillar or the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
The tire pressure monitoring system* is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra-
matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
i
Operating radio transmission equip-
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem* to malfunction.
320
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the tire pressure monitor-
ing system*
The tire pressure monitoring system* must
be reactivated in the following situations:
앫If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘Using the placard of the driver’s door
B-pillar or, if available, on the inside of
the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire in-
flation pressure of all four tires is cor-
rect.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the current inflation pres-
sures for each tire appear in the multi-
function display or the following
message appears in the multifunction
display:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few mins.
왘Press the reset button on the instru-
ment cluster (컄page 24).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Check current
tire pres.?
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
sures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/ or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight (as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door opening). Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a blow-
out.
i
If you are transporting a deflated tire in
the vehicle, do not activate the tire
pressure monitoring system* until
앫the deflated tire is no longer in the
vehicle
앫you have inflated the tire to the cor-
rect pressure
321
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pres. monitor
reactivated
The tire pressure monitoring system*
will now monitor the tire inflation pres-
sure values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few mins.
This display appears until the individual
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed (컄page 390).
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘Press the ç button.
If one of the following messages appears in
the multifunction display:
앫
reactivate tire
pressure monitor
after rectifying
pressure
앫
Tire pressure
Please rectify
왘Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘Reactivate the tire pressure monitoring
system*.
i
After you have reactivated the tire
pressure monitoring system*, the cur-
rent tire inflation pressure values will
only be shown after several minutes of
driving. During this time, the following
message appears in the display:
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few mins.
The time before the tire inflation pres-
sures are shown depends on whether
or not
앫you have mounted new tires
앫the old tires are still on the vehicle
If you have mounted new tires, it will
take slightly longer before the tire infla-
tion pressures are shown in the display.
322
Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tire inflation pressure
Underinflated tires can:
앫cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫adversely affect fuel economy
앫lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫adversely affect handling
characteristics
Overinflated tire inflation pressure
Overinflated tires can:
앫adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫cause uneven tire wear
앫be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫adversely affect ride comfort
앫increase stopping distance
i
If the positions of the wheels have not
been changed on the vehicle, the tire
inflation pressures are shown correctly
after a short period. If the positions of
the wheels have been switched, howev-
er, it is possible that the tire inflation
pressures are temporarily shown for
the wrong wheel positions. They are
corrected after a few minutes of driv-
ing, and the tire inflation pressures are
shown for the correct wheel positions.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
323
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle's tires:
1Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄page 330)
2DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄page 327)
3Maximum tire load (컄page 329)
4Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄page 329)
5Manufacturer
6Tire ply material (컄page 332)
7Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄page 323)
8Load identification (컄page 327)
9Tire name
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1Tire width
2Aspect ratio in %
3Radial tire code
4Rim diameter
5Tire load rating
6Tire speed rating
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (컄page 443).
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
324
Operation
Tires and wheels
General:
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
The tire width 1 (컄page 323) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio 2 (컄page 323) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄page 323) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄page 325).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄page 323) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄page 323) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄page 329) where the maximum load as-
sociated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
325
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄page 327).
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄page 323)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄page 333) of your vehi-
cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄page 323) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄page 323) are
also referred to as “service descrip-
tion”.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
i
Tire load rating 5 (컄page 323) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄page 323) are
also referred to as “service descrip-
tion”.
326
Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires
앫At the tire manufacturer's option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄page 323) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄page 323).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄page 323) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed ca-
pability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄page 323) is given, the speed capa-
bility is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capabil-
ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
앫Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
thesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Index Speed rating
QM+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
TM+S up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
HM+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
VM+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
The marking “M+S” next to the service
description designates tires with mud
and snow capabilities.
327
Operation
Tires and wheels
Load identification
1Load identification
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄page 325).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
328
Operation
Tires and wheels
1DOT
2Manufacturer’s identification mark
3Tire size
4Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5Date of manufacture
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄page 328)
which denotes the tire meets require-
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-
tation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄page 328) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
bols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄page 307).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄page 328) indicates the
tire size.
Tire type code
The code 4 (컄page 328) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄page 328)
identifies the week and year of manufac-
ture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
329
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire load
1Maximum tire load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄page 324).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄page 313).
Maximum tire inflation pressure
1Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
330
Operation
Tires and wheels
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄page 316) for proper
tire inflation.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance.
1Treadwear
2Traction
3Temperature resistance
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Warning! G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-
ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
tance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road de-
bris, potholes etc. i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
331
Operation
Tires and wheels
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
332
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material
1Plies in sidewall
2Plies under tread
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bar.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehi-
cle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
333
Operation
Tires and wheels
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
dard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passen-
gers and cargo.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GWV must never exceed the
GWVR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passen-
gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for
air pressure is bar. There are
100 kilopascals (kPa) to one bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.
334
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
turers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
335
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Vehicle capacity weight
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
Rotating tires
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄page 310).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
Warning! G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
336
Operation
Tires and wheels
If applicable to your vehicle's tire configu-
ration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer's recommended in-
tervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-
sary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄page 310).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 402) and
(컄page 419).
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
337
Operation
Winter driving
왔Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing temperatures
(컄page 456).
앫Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started,
even at low ambient temperatures.
앫Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC in
winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
tices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/6in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
Warning! G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
338
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heat-
er.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-
turer's mounting instructions.
앫Only use snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
앫Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
!
When driving with snow chains, always
select the raised level of the level con-
trol system Airmatic* (컄page 245).
Other settings may result in damage to
your vehicle.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄page 91) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle’s traction.
!
Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive
use snow chains on rear tires only.
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with tire sizes:
앫265/35 ZR18 XL
앫T 155/70 R17 110 M
339
Operation
Maintenance
왔Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service indi-
cator display.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in ve-
hicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The maintenance service indicator will no-
tify you when your next maintenance ser-
vice is due.
Starting approximately one month before
maintenance service is due, one of the fol-
lowing messages will appear in the multi-
function display while you are driving or
when you switch on the ignition (example
service A):
Service A in XXXX miles (km)
Service A in XX days
Service A in X day
Service A due now!
The maintenance services will be indicated
by showing a service type A through type H
in the multifunction display. Types A
through H are classified based on estimat-
ed time needed to perform the mainte-
nance service, ranging:
from
Service A
(approx. one hour)
to
Service H
(approx. eight hours)
When the service type appears, you can
use the vehicle’s control system to view a
list of the service items (1-14) that need to
be performed at the called for service type
(컄page 343).
i
The additional + after the type of ser-
vice indicates the degree of wear of the
brake pads.
The brake pads may reach their wear
limit in the time period up to the next
service interval.
Have the brake pads checked and, if
necessary, replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center during your
next service appointment.
340
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator
You can clear the maintenance service in-
dicator.
왘Press the reset button 1 on the left
side of the instrument cluster.
The maintenance service indicator is
cleared and the standard display ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested main-
tenance service term, you will see the fol-
lowing message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
Service A exceeded by X day
In addition, a signal sounds when the mes-
sage appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
i
Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS
(Flexible Service System PLUS) only
(Canada vehicles): The interval be-
tween maintenance services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
341
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 153).
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator with the
service symbol 9 or ´ and the
service deadline appears in the multi-
function display.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator re-
set. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the main-
tenance service indicator in the mainte-
nance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the maintenance
service indicator. To arrive at the true
maintenance service deadline, you will
need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service
indicator.
Do not confuse the maintenance ser-
vice indicator with the engine oil level
indicator :.
i
If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting
the system without performing the
proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will re-
sult in engine damage and/or other ve-
hicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
342
Operation
Maintenance
Setting the date for special works
You can enter appointments for exhaust
gas analysis and general inspection using
the maintenance system.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 153).
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance indicator appears in the
multifunction display.
왘Press the reset button (컄page 24) for
about five seconds.
The
Service menu
appears in the multi-
function display.
왘Select the
Addit. Work
menu with the
+ or - button.
왘Press the ÿ button.
The service indicator now displays the
Addit. Work
menu.
왘Select the
Exh.-gas analysis
or
General inspection
menu with the
+ or - button.
왘Press the ÿ button.
The service indicator now displays the
Next due date
menu.
왘Select the
Month a
nd
Year
with the
+ or - button.
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel to set the
month and year.
왘Select
Confirm
with the + or -
button.
왘Press the ÿ button.
The new date is set.
343
Operation
Maintenance
왘Press the è button on the multi-
function steering wheel until the stan-
dard display appears in the
multifunction display.
The maintenance service system now re-
calculates the values. You cannot call up
the service display or the service menu
during this time.
Calling up the maintenance service
data information
The maintenance service indicator shows
the maintenance service type (letters A-H)
in the multifunction display approximately
one month before the service appointment
is due in miles (distance criterion) or in
days (time criterion).
This maintenance service type is based on
the service items to be carried out. The
service items are described in the Mainte-
nance Booklet.
The service items to be carried out under
the corresponding service type can be dis-
played in the multifunction display.
Calling up the service item menu
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 34).
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 153).
왘Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator appears
in the multifunction display.
왘Press the reset button (컄page 24) for
about five seconds.
The
Service menu
appears in the multi-
function display (컄page 153).
왘Select the
Items
menu with the +
or - button.
왘Press the ÿ button.
The service indicator now displays the
Items
menu.
왘Press button è on the multifunction
steering wheel until the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display.
i
The service items to be carried out are
shown in this menu.
Please refer to the Maintenance Book-
let for a description of each service
item.
344
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-
tack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by ex-
treme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫Air pollution
앫Road salt
앫Tar
앫Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
앫Grease and oil
앫Fuel
앫Coolant
앫Brake fluid
앫Bird droppings
앫Insects
앫Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/ or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫Near the ocean
앫In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫During winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Warning! G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
345
Operation
Vehicle care
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod-
ucts.
Power washer
When using a power wash for cleaning the
vehicle, always observe the manufactur-
er’s operating instructions.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inad-
vertently locked or unlocked.
!
Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
346
Operation
Vehicle care
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
cle doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical compo-
nents and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bush-
ings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro-
tected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap-
proved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inad-
vertently locked or unlocked.
347
Operation
Vehicle care
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
er.
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
1Distronic system sensor cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water to clean sensor
cover 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
Wiper blades
왘Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-
tical position.
For information on placing the wipers in a
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
blades” (컄page 416).
i
Restart the engine after cleaning sen-
sor cover 1.
!
The windshield wipers must be in a ver-
tical position before folding them away
from the windshield. They could other-
wise damage the hood.
컄컄
348
Operation
Vehicle care
왘Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
Window cleaning
왘Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-
tical position.
For information on placing the wipers in a
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
blades” (컄page 416).
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Light alloy wheels
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow the instructions on the container.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the wiper blades.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
!
The windshield wipers must be in a ver-
tical position before folding them away
from the windshield. They could other-
wise damage the hood.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
컄컄
349
Operation
Vehicle care
Instrument cluster
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in a lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
350
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that has the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
352
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instru-
ment cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the igni-
tion, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
-The yellow ABS malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
switched off (see messages in display).
The SBC brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without the ABS available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth-
er systems such as Distronic*, or the auto-
matic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘Read and observe messages in the
display (컄page 362).
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
왘Switch off electrical consumers that
are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating.
왘If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
vThe yellow ABS/ESP warning
lamp comes on while driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
Risk of accident!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
왘Switch the ESP back on (컄page 92).
If the ESP cannot be switched back on,
have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
vThe yellow ABS/ESP warning
lamp flashes while driving.
The ABS, ESP or traction control has come
into operation because of detected traction
loss in at least one tire. Distronic* is deacti-
vated.
Distronic* is switched off.
왘When driving off, apply as little
throttle as possible.
왘While driving, ease up on the acceler-
ator.
왘Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄page 91)
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
354
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
3(Canada only)
;(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘Release the parking brake.
왘Observe the additional message in
the display.
3(Canada only)
;(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
앫There is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system.
앫There is insufficient brake fluid in the res-
ervoir.
왘Risk of accident! Do not drive any fur-
ther. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center. Under no circum-
stances should you top up the brake
fluid. This will not solve the problem.
Warning! G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
355
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
? (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine mal-
function indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction in:
앫The fuel management system
앫The ignition system (Gasoline engine)
앫The emission control system
앫Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
왘Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is used by
the service station to link the vehicle to the
shop diagnostics system. It allows the accu-
rate identification of system malfunctions
through the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area of the
footwell next to the parking brake.
A loss of pressure has been detected in the
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘Check the fuel cap.
If it is not closed properly:
왘Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘Have the fuel system checked by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘After refuelling start, turn off and restart the
engine three or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not
need to have your vehicle checked.
356
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
DThe red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra-
diator fan may be broken.
왘Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄page 303).
왘Have the cooling system checked.
왘If the coolant temperature is below
257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
DThe red coolant warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
The coolant temperature has exceeded
257°F (125°C).
왘Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.
lThe red DTR warning lamp
comes on while driving.
You are too close to the vehicle in front of you
to maintain selected speed.
왘Apply the brakes immediately to in-
crease the following distance.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
357
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
lThe red DTR warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning chime sound.
앫You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle
ahead of you.
앫The distance warning system has recog-
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob-
able line of travel.
왘Apply the brakes immediately.
왘Carefully observe the traffic situation.
You may need to brake or maneuver
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
WThe yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 296).
<The red seat belt telltale comes
on after starting the engine with
all doors closed.
The seat belt telltale reminds you and your
front passenger to fasten your seat belts be-
fore driving off.
왘Fasten your seat belts.
The red seat belt telltale flashes
and you additionally hear an in-
termittent warning signal with in-
creasing intensity for a maximum
of 60 seconds when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h).
You and/or your front passenger have for-
gotten to fasten your seat belts.
There are items placed on the front passen-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘Fasten your seat belts.
왘Remove the items from the front pas-
senger seat and put them in a safe
place.
358
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
HThe yellow warning lamp for the
tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem* comes on.
The tire pressure monitoring system* de-
tects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
왘Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Take note of the messages in the multi-
function display.
The warning lamp goes out once the tire in-
flation pressure monitor has been reactivat-
ed after the tire inflation pressures have
been corrected.
Warning! G
When the tire pressure monitoring system*
warning light is lit, one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. You should
stop and check your tires as soon as possi-
ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as speci-
fied in the vehicle placard and owner’s
manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pres-
sures for your vehicle can be found on
the placard of the driver’s door B-pillar
or the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in
the owner’s manual.
359
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
1The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-
tems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
360
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
75
The indicator lamp illuminates and remains
illuminated with the weight of a typical adult
or someone larger than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Also note any messages in the
multifunction display and follow cor-
rective steps (컄page 369).
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
361
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution
75
The indicator lamp does not illuminate
and/or does not remain illuminated with
the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in
a standard child restraint or less on the
front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
ion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
왘Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present.
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘If the light remains out, have the system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘Also note any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄page 369).
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight off
a typical 12-month-old child in a standard
child restraint or less on the front passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
362
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multi-
function display
Warning and malfunction messages ap-
pear in the multifunction display located in
the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messag-
es are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄page 161) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄page 24) or but-
ton j, k, ÿ, or è on the
steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and mes-
sages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄page 24) or but-
ton j, k, ÿ, or è on the
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄page 161). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message dis-
appear. Clearing a message will not cor-
rect the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning! G
All categories of messages contain impor-
tant information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
age or personal injury.
Warning! G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
Contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
363
Practical hints
What to do if …
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are
devided into two sections:
앫Text messages (컄page 364)
앫Symbol messages (컄page 373)
i
Switching on the ignition causes all in-
strument cluster lamps (expect low
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high
beam headlamp indicator lamp, and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) as well as the multifunction dis-
play to come on. Make sure the lamps
and multifunction display are in work-
ing order before starting your journey.
364
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ABS Malfunction
Visit workshop
The ABS has detected a malfunction
and has switched off.
The ESP and the BAS are also deac-
tivated.
The SBC brake system is still func-
tioning normally but without the ABS
available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking, reduc-
ing steering capability.
왘Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The ABS or the ABS display is
malfunctioning.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
365
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
Low
Battery
Conven. functions
temporarily
unavailable
The battery has insufficient voltage
and can no longer supply conve-
nience functions such as the rear
window defroster.
As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
the consumers will switch on again.
Please note: Conven. functions
available again
On-board voltage is sufficient; the
consumers will switch on again.
Cruise control Drive to workshop
Cruise control or Distronic* is mal-
functioning.
왘Have the cruise control or Distronic*
checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Distronic External interference
Reactivate
The Distronic* is switched off and is
temporarily unavailable.
왘Try activating the Distronic* again later.
Visit workshop
The Distronic* is malfunctioning or
the display is malfunctioning.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
366
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
Distronic Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
DISTRONIC* is switched off if:
앫the DISTRONIC cover in the area
of the radiator grille is dirty
앫the functionality is impaired by
heavy rain or thick fog
왘If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC cover in
the area of the radiator grille.
왘Restart the vehicle.
or
DISTRONIC* becomes operational again with-
out the engine being restarted when:
앫dirt on the grille falls off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
앫the system recognizes full sensor availabili-
ty (due to lessening rain or the road surface
drying)
앫the message in the multifunction display
disappears
앫the speed last stored flashes in the display
for five seconds.
You can operate DISTRONIC* as usual again.
367
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ESP Malfunction
Visit workshop
The ESP has detected a malfunction
and switched off.
The ABS may not be operational.
The SBC brake system is still func-
tioning normally but without the ESP
available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
The ESP is deactivated because the
power supply was interrupted.
The SBC brake system is still func-
tioning normally but without the ESP
available.
왘Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle sta-
tionary, turn the steering wheel completely
to the left and then to the right to synchro-
nize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go with-
out the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
368
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution
ESP Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The ESP or the ESP display is
malfunctioning.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
PGear selector lever in
Park
You have attempted to turn off the
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button with the gear se-
lector lever not in P. You have
opened the driver's door with the
gear selector lever not in P.
왘Place the gear selector lever in position P.
P/N Shift to Neutral or Park
You have attempted to start the en-
gine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button while the gear se-
lector lever was in position R or D.
왘Place the gear selector lever in position P
or N. Make sure the brake pedal is de-
pressed.
369
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag activated
see Oper.’s Man.
Front passenger front air
bag is activated while driv-
ing even though a child,
small individual, or object
below the system's weight
threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the
front passenger seat is
empty. Objects on the seat
or forces acting on the seat
may make the system
sense supplemental
weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
and check the following:
왘Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
ion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
왘Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present.
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight
and sense that an occupant on the front passenger
seat is of a heavier weight than actually present.
(Continued on next page)
370
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag activated
see Oper.’s Man.
If performing any of the above corrective steps is suc-
cessful, the message
Front passenger airbag deacti-
vated
will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied. Note that
after performing the corrective steps, it may take up to
60 seconds for the message
Front passenger airbag
deactivated
to appear.
If the message
Front passenger airbag activated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
75 indicator lamp remains out even after
performing the above corrective steps, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not have any children12 years old and under and
other small individuals use the front passenger seat un-
til the system has been repaired.
Warning! G
If the message
Front passenger airbag
activated
remains on in the multifunction
display and/or the 75 indicator
lamp remains out even after performing the
above corrective steps, do not have any
children12 years old and under and other
small individuals use the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
Front passenger front air
bag is deactivated while
driving even though an
adult or someone larger
than a small individual is
occupying the front pas-
senger seat. Forces acting
on the seat may make the
system sense a decrease
in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
and check the following:
왘Do not lean on armrests or lift yourself up using han-
dle over the door.
왘Adjust the seat in a height position (컄page 39).
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
cases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the
seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense
that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually
present is on the front passenger seat.
왘Re-position yourself.
왘Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with
your back against the seat backrest.
If performing any of the above corrective steps is
successful, the message
Front passenger airbag
activated
will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied.
(Continued on next page)
372
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Front passenger
airbag deactivated
see Oper.’s Man.
Note that after performing the corrective steps, it may
take up to 60 seconds for the message
Front passen-
ger airbag activated
to appear.
If the message
Front passenger airbag deactivated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
75 indicator lamp remains on even after
performing the above corrective steps, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Warning! G
If the message
Front passenger airbag
deactivated
remains on in the multifunc-
tion display and/or the 75 indica-
tor lamp remains illuminated even after
performing the above corrective steps, do
not have any passenger use the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been re-
paired.
373
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
#
Undervoltage
Switch off
consumers
The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘Turn off unnecessary electrical con-
sumers.
Visit workshop
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘Have the battery checked at a service
station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫alternator malfunctioning
앫broken poly-V-belt
Do not forget that the brake system re-
quires electrical energy and may be oper-
ating with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is in-
creased.
왘Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
374
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
#
Battery/Alternator
Stop vehicle
The battery is malfunctioning.
The SBC brake system requires electrical
energy and therefore has only limited op-
eration. Considerably greater brake pedal
force is required and the stopping dis-
tance is increased.
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Adjust driving to be consis-
tent with reduced braking responsive-
ness.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Low voltage
Start engine
The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘Start the engine (컄page 47).
Malfunction
Electrical consumers
switched off
The consumer battery has insufficient
voltage and can no longer supply the con-
venience functions such as seat ventila-
tion*.
The electrical consumers will come back
online as soon as on-board voltage is suf-
ficient.
(
Backrest, right rear
not locked
The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
fully engaged in position.
Backrest, left rear
not locked
The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
fully engaged in position.
375
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
2
Brake wear
Visit workshop
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected at the intervals specified in
the Maintenance Booklet.
왘Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
T
Reduced braking power
Depress brake
pedal fully
The SBC brake system is in emergency
operation mode. Considerably greater
brake pedal force is required and the
stopping distance is increased.
The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph
(90 km/h).
왘Do not drive any further.
왘Stop the vehicle and notify an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Significantly greater force must be ap-
plied to the brake pedal.
왘Call for Roadside Assistance.
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
3
Reduced braking power
Start engine
The battery has insufficient voltage and
cannot supply sufficient power to the
SBC brake system.
왘Start the engine.
The message disappears when suffi-
cient voltage is available.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet.
376
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
3
Reduced braking power
Visit workshop
The SBC brake system is in emergency
operation mode. Considerable brake ped-
al force is required and the stopping dis-
tance is increased.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Service brake
Visit workshop
There are malfunctions, but the SBC
brake system is operating normally.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake overheated
Drive carefully
The brake system is overheated due to an
excessive load on the brakes.
왘Relieve the load on the brake system.
왘Drive more smoothly and think ahead
to avoid unnecessary braking.
왘When driving down slopes, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking
power (컄page 185).
왘Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.
Release
parking brake
You are driving with the parking brake
set.
왘Release the parking brake
(컄page 49).
377
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
3
Brake fluid
Visit workshop
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
will not solve the problem.
Warning! G
Driving while these messages are displayed
can result in an accident. Have your brake
system checked immediately.
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/ dolly
equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor-
mation, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
(컄page 430).
If the SBC brake system enters its emergen-
cy operation mode, the driver must apply
significantly greater brake pedal pressure
and depress the pedal much further than
normal to obtain braking effect. If neces-
sary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes may only be applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
378
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
? (USA only)
± (Canada only)
Visit workshop
There may be a malfunction in the:
앫fuel injection system
앫ignition system
앫exhaust system
앫fuel system
왘Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
B
Coolant
Check level
The coolant level is too low. 왘Add coolant (컄page 303).
왘If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major en-
gine damage.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
During severe operation conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Ï
Coolant
Stop, engine off
The coolant is too hot. 왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could other-
wise damage the engine.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
380
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
Ï
Coolant
Stop, engine off
The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Warranty.
왘Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Coolant
Visit workshop
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Observe the coolant temperature dis-
play.
왘Have the fan replaced as soon as pos-
sible.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
G
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The displays for several systems have
malfunctioned. Some systems them-
selves may also have malfunctioned.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
When the display is malfunctioning,
warnings and malfunction messages
might not be displayed.
왘Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
±
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
앫Coolant temperature display
앫Tachometer
앫Cruise control display
왘Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
J
Doors open
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘Close the doors.
382
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
: USA only:
Add 1 Qt. engine oil
at next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 Liter engine oil
at next refueling
The engine oil level is too low. 왘Add engine oil (컄page 302) and
check the engine oil level
(컄page 301).
Engine oil level
Stop, engine off
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Add engine oil (컄page 302) and
check the engine oil level
(컄page 301).
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging:
앫the engine
앫the catalytic converter
왘Have oil siphoned or drained off. Ob-
serve all legal requirements with re-
spect to its disposal.
383
Practical hints
What to do if …
When the
Engine oil - Visit workshop
message appears while the engine is run-
ning and at operating temperature, the en-
gine oil level has dropped to approximately
the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the required
level with an approved oil specified in the
Factory Approved Service Products pam-
phlet.
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
:
Engine oil
Visit workshop
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
왘Check the engine oil level
(컄page 301) and add oil as required
(컄page 302).
왘If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
It may be that there is water in the engine
oil.
왘Have the engine oil checked.
Engine oil level
Visit workshop
The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
384
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
%
Hood open
You are driving with the hood open. 왘Close the hood (컄page 299).
F
Key
Check battery
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter-
ies are discharged.
왘Change the batteries (컄page 408).
Key
not recognized
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running
because
앫the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle
앫there is strong radio-frequency inter-
ference
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be cen-
trally locked nor can the engine be
started again after the engine is
stopped.
Key
not recognized
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo-
mentarily not recognized.
왘Change the position of the SmartKey
in the vehicle.
왘Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if nec-
essary.
Key
still in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
왘Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
Keyless Go
Check system
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction-
ing.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
F
Do not
forget key
This display appears (for a maximum of
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey
in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
왘Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘Take the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
the vehicle.
Remove key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
Replace key
There is no additional code available for
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the re-
serve mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 296).
Check gas cap
See Operator’s Manual
A loss of pressure has been detected in
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky.
왘Check the fuel cap (컄page 297).
If it is not closed properly:
왘Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
386
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
.
Brake lamp
Drive to workshop
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or
lamp is permanently on.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp, left
Substitute bulb on
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp, right
Substitute bulb on
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
The display for the lamps or the system is
malfunctioning.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp,
left
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Front foglamp,
right
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Active Hdlmp.
currently
unavailable
The active headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active Hdlmp.
Backup lamp on
The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
Another light is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active Hdlmp.
malfunction
Drive to workshop
The active headlamps have malfunc-
tioned several times in succession.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
.
High beam,
left
The left high beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
High beam,
right
The right high beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
License plate lamp,
left
The left license plate lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
License plate lamp,
right
The right license plate lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Light sensor
Drive to workshop
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘In the control system, set lamp opera-
tion to manual mode (컄page 170).
왘Switch on headlamps using the exteri-
or lamp switch.
Low beam,
left
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Backup lamp, left
The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Backup lamp, right
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
388
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
.
Low beam,
right
The right low beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front Marker light
,
left
The front left side marker lamp is mal-
functioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Front Marker light,
right
The front right side marker lamp is mal-
functioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Fr. Park. lamp, left
The left parking lamps are malfunction-
ing.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Fr. Park. lamp, right
The right parking lamps are malfunction-
ing.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Rear foglamp
Substitute bulb on
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Switch off lamps
Lamps have been turned on although the
SmartKey in the starter switch is in posi-
tion 0.
왘Switch off the headlights.
389
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
.
Taillamp, left
Substitute bulb on
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A sub-
stitute bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Taillamp, right
Substitute bulb on
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.
왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Turn sig., left rear
Substitute bulb on
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn sig., right rear
Substitute bulb on
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn sig., left front
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn sig., right front
The right front turn signal lamp is mal-
functioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn signal,
left
mirror
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
Turn signal,
right
mirror
The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
390
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Tire pres. monitor
reactivated
The tire pressure monitoring system* is
using the current pressure values as the
basis for monitoring.
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving
a few mins.
The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.
Tire pres. monitor
temporarily
unavailable
The tire pressure monitoring system* is
unable to monitor the tire inflation pres-
sure due to
앫the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫excessive wheel sensor tempera-
tures.
앫a nearby radio interference source.
앫unrecognized wheel sensors mount-
ed.
왘Remove any extra wheel sensors from
the vehicle.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction
have been removed, the tire pressure
monitoring system* automatically be-
comes active again.
Tire pres.
Please rectify
The pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
왘Check and correct tire inflation pres-
sure as required (컄page 318).
391
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Reactivate
tire pres. monitor
after corr. pres.
There was a tire pressure warning mes-
sage.
The yellow warning lamp for the tire pres-
sure monitoring system* comes on and
you have not reactivated the system
since the last tire pressure warning mes-
sage.
왘Reactivate the tire pressure monitoring
system* after correcting the tire pressure
values (컄page 320).
Tire pres. monitor
deactivated
Drive to workshop
The tire inflation pressure monitor is mal-
functioning.
A wheel without proper sensor was in-
stalled.
왘Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
392
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire pressure
One or more tires is deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Ob-
serve the traffic situation around you.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tire pres.
Check tire
The tire inflation pressure in one or
more tires is already below the mini-
mum value.
The tire inflation pressure in one or
more tires is low.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Check the tires.
왘Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 419).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
393
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire pres., RL
The left rear tire is deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tire pressure, RL
Check tire
The left rear tire inflation pressure is
low.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘Check the tire.
왘Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 419).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
394
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire pres., RR
The right rear tire is deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tire pressure, RR
Check tire
The right rear tire inflation pressure is
low.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘Check the tire.
왘Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 419).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
395
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire pres., FL
The left front tire is deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tire pressure, FL
Check tire
The left front tire inflation pressure is
low.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘Check the tire.
왘Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 419).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
396
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire pres., FR
The right front tire is deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
왘Change the wheel (컄page 419).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tire pressure, FR
Check tire
The right front tire inflation pressure
is low.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘Check the tire.
왘Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 419).
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
397
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
<
Seat belt system
Drive to workshop
The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
9
Service memory full
See Operator’s Manual
The maintenance system service memory
cannot save any more data.
왘Have the service memory checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
K
Close
Sunroof
You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
왘Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄page 225).
J
Close
Sunroof
You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.
왘Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄page 225).
398
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
L
Tele Aid malfunction
Drive to workshop
One or more main functions of the Tele
Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1
Restraint system
malfunction
Drive to workshop
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
essarily which could also result in injury.
399
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
t
Function
unavailable
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
&
Tailgate open
This message will appear whenever the
tailgate is open.
왘Close the tailgate.
W
Washer fluid,
please refill
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3
of total reservoir capacity.
왘Add washer fluid (컄page 306).
400
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution
@
Vehicle rising
Your vehicle is adjusting to your level se-
lection.
Leveling cancelled
The “Raised” level setting is canceled at
vehicle speeds of over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
왘Reactivate the “Raised” level setting.
Stop, car too low
The vehicle level control is malfunction-
ing.
Avoid excessive steering input. The fend-
er or tires could otherwise be damaged.
Listen for scraping noises. Do not drive
faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘Drive to the side of the road and se-
lect a higher vehicle level. Depending
on the type of malfunction, this may
raise the vehicle’s level.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Visit workshop
The system is functional only to a limited
extent.
The system display or the system is mal-
functioning.
왘Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘Have the vehicle checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
401
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is in the storage compart-
ment at the front edge of the front passen-
ger seat.
1Tab
왘Pull tab 1 upward.
왘Fold the covering forward.
왘Remove the first aid kit.
Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel
The vehicle tool kit is located in the cargo
compartment underneath the third row
seat cushions and footwell.
1Release handle for seat backrest
2Release handle for seat cushion
왘Pull release handle 1 and fold seat
backrest for the folding bench seat up-
ward.
왘Pull release handle 2, fold seat cush-
ion upward and remove it
(컄page 136).
1Release handle
2Footwell
왘Pull release handle 1 and fold
footwell 2 up.
왘To lock, fold footwell 2 back into its
original position and press it down until
it engages.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
i
In order to access the vehicle tool kit,
you must first detach the side cover.
402
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
1Handle
2Cover
왘Turn handle 1 to the right as far as it
will go and remove cover 2.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located in the cargo
compartment underneath the third row
seat cushions and footwell. To access the
spare wheel, fold seat cushions and foot-
well up (컄page 401).
1Vehicle tool kit
Wheel bolt wrench and Jack
2Spare wheel
3Luggage bowl
Removing the spare wheel
왘Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise.
왘Remove spare wheel 2.
Storing the spare wheel
왘Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.
왘Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the spare wheel.
Minispare wheel
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
rarily use the Minispare wheel when ob-
serving the following restrictions:
앫Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80km /h).
앫Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate.
앫Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The Minispare wheel should only be used
temporarily, and replaced with a regular
road wheel as quickly as possible.
403
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄page 446).
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com-
partment underneath the cargo compart-
ment floor (컄page 402).
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫One pair of universal pliers
앫One towing eye bolt
앫One wheel wrench
앫One alignment bolt
앫One fuse extractor
앫Spare fuses
앫Collapsible wheel chock
앫A pair of gloves
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
1Tilt the plates upward
2Fold the lower plate outward
3Insert the plate
왘Tilt both plates upward 1.
왘Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
404
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, open the driver’s door using
the mechanical key.
1Mechanical key locking tab
2Mechanical key
왘Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
the arrow and slide mechanical key 2
out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
3Unlocking
4Locking
왘Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
i
Unlocking driver’s door and/or the
trunk with the mechanical key will trig-
ger the anti-theft alarm system. To can-
cel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the
starter switch.
405
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
왘Close the passenger doors and the tail-
gate.
왘Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄page 123).
왘Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors are still
visible. If necessary, push them down
manually.
왘Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
SmartKey.
왘Lock the driver’s door with the me-
chanical key.
Fuel filler flap emergency release
1Release knob
왘Remove right-side tail trim.
왘Turn release knob 1 clockwise (ar-
row).
The fuel filler flap can know be opened.
Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
In the case of power failure, the transmis-
sion selector lever can be manually un-
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle is equipped with cup holders in either
the center console or in the center arm-
rest.
Cup holder in the center console
1Pin
406
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘Open the storage compartment in the
center console (컄page 263).
왘Take out the cup holder (컄page 263).
왘Hold the cover at a 45° angle.
왘Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘Remove pin 1.
Cup holder in the center armrest
1Pin
왘Open the storage compartment in the
center armrest (컄page 263).
왘Take out the cup holder (컄page 263).
왘Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘Remove pin 1.
i
The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
i
The selector lever is locked again when
moving it to position P.
407
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔Opening/closing in an emergency
Tilt/sliding sunroof*
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof or manually should an electrical mal-
function occur.
The tilt/ sliding sunroof drive is located be-
hind cover 1 of the interior overhead
light.
1Cover
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Press on cover 1 in direction of the ar-
row to release it.
2Hole
3Crank
왘Take crank 3 out of the glove box.
왘Insert crank 3 through hole 2.
왘Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
앫slide sunroof closed
앫raise sunroof at the rear
왘Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫slide sunroof open
앫lower sunroof at the rear
i
Do not disconnect the electrical con-
nectors.
i
Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof or must be
resynchronized after being operated
manually (컄page 227).
408
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
charged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
SmartKey
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘Remove the mechanical key 1
(컄page 408).
1Mechanical key
2Battery compartment
왘Insert the mechanical key 1 in side
opening and push gray slide.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
왘Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing in direction of arrow.
왘Remove the batteries.
Warning! G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.
i
When replacing batteries, always re-
place both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
409
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
3Battery
4Contact spring
왘Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
왘Return battery compartment into hous-
ing until it locks into place.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘Remove mechanical key (컄page 408).
1Battery
2Tilt battery up
3Mechanical key
왘Insert the mechanical key 3 in side
opening and push grey slide.
Battery compartment is unlatched.
왘Pull battery compartment out of the
housing in direction of arrow.
왘Using mechanical key 3 apply pres-
sure to position 2.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
왘Pull out batteries 1 in direction of ar-
row.
왘Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries with the plus (+) side facing up.
왘Return battery compartment into hous-
ing until it locks into place.
410
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
i
If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of
high humidity, driving the vehicle a dis-
tance with the lights on should clear up
the fogging.
i
Substitute bulbs will be brought into
use when lamps malfunction. Observe
the messages in the multifunction dis-
play (컄page 386).
411
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Rear lamps
Lamp Type
1Additional turn signal
lamps
LED
2Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
3Side marker lamp W 5 W
4Halogen headlamps:
Low beam
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low and high beam1
1Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. See your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
H7 (55 W)
D2S-35 W
5Halogen headlamps:
High beam/high beam
flasher
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
High beam flasher
H7 (55 W)
H7 (55 W)
Parking and standing
lamps
W 5 W
6Front fog lamp H1 (55 W)
Lamp Type
7High mounted brake
lamp
LED
8Brake lamp HiP
LED*
Turn signal lamp HiP
Tail, parking, standing
and side marker lamp
HiP
Rear fog lamp (driver’s
side)
HiP
9License plate lamps C 5 W
412
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement
앫Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫Additional turn signals in the exteri-
or rear view mirrors
앫High mounted brake lamp
앫Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫Front fog lamps
앫Rear lamps (except license plate
lamps)
Warning! G
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al-
low the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫touch or move it when hot
앫drop the bulb
앫scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps,
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recom-
mend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
i
Have the headlamp adjustment
checked regularly.
413
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
1Bulb socket for high beam head-
lamp/high beam flasher bulb
2Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
3Housing cover for low
beam/Bi-Xenon* headlamp
4Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
5Electrical connector for high beam
headlamp/high beam flasher bulb
6Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
7Electrical connector for low beam
headlamp bulb (halogen headlamps
only)
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄page 141).
왘Open the hood (컄page 299) (except
for side marker lamps).
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover 3 for the
Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high
voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to
replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its
components. We recommend that you have
such work done by a qualified technician.
414
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only)
왘Turn housing cover 3 counterclock-
wise and remove it.
왘Pull electrical connector 7 off.
왘Unclip the retainer spring on the bulb
socket and take out the bulb.
왘Insert the new bulb so that its base lo-
cates in the recess on the lower left
and is level to it.
왘Clip on the retainer spring.
왘Plug electrical connector 7 onto the
bulb.
왘Align housing cover 3 and turn it
clockwise.
High beam bulb/high beam flasher
bulb (halogen headlamps)/high beam
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
왘Turn bulb socket 1 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘Pull electrical connector 5 off.
왘Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 1.
왘Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 1 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘Plug electrical connector 5 onto the
bulb.
왘Place bulb socket 1 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘Turn bulb socket 4 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 4.
왘Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 4 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘Place bulb socket 4 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.
왘Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 6.
왘Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 6 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘Press bulb socket 6 back into the
lamp.
415
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb
왘Carefully slide the lamp towards the
front in direction of arrows.
왘Remove the rear end first.
왘Turn the bulb socket with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘Insert the new bulb into the bulb sock-
et.
왘Place the bulb socket back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
왘To reinstall the lamp, set the front end
in the bumper and let the rear end en-
gage.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
License plate lamp
1Screw
왘Switch off the lights.
왘Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
왘Retighten the screws.
Warning! G
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be re-
placed individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
under pressure and could explode during an
attempt to replace them.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
them exchanged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
416
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing wiper blades
왘Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1.
왘Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄page 52).
왘With wiper arm in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
왘Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.
왘Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm.
왘Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.
!
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle's on-board electronics have status
0) before replacing a wiper blade. Other-
wise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
417
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm
until it locks in place.
왘Rotate the wiper blade into position
parallel to wiper arm.
왘Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
418
Practical hints
Flat tire
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
rarily use the spare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
앫Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/ h).
앫Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate.
앫Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Preparing the vehicle
왘Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight-ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘Move the selector lever to P.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘Turn off the engine (컄page 57).
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the
gear selector lever once (컄page 59).
왘Open the driver’s door (this puts the ig-
nition in position 0, same as with the
SmartKey removed from the starter
switch). The driver’s door then can be
closed again.
왘Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel and
the collapsible tire are different from those
of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle
handling characteristics change when driv-
ing with a spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
rarily, and replaced with a regular road
wheel as quickly as possible.
i
Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
419
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘Take the spare wheel out of the cargo
compartment (컄page 402).
왘Take the wheel wrench and the jack
out of the cargo compartment
(컄page 402).
Lifting the vehicle
왘Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘Place one chock in front of and one be-
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
왘On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
420
Practical hints
Flat tire
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
rectly behind the front wheel housing and
in front of the rear wheel housing.
1Jack take-up bracket
2Jack
3Crank
왘Position jack 2 on firm ground under
the respective jack take-up bracket 1.
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
under the take-up bracket so that it is al-
ways vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the
side, even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
cline.
왘Turn crank 3 until the tire is a maxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is
raised.
Warning! G
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
brackets designed for this purpose.
If the jack is not properly positioned, the ve-
hicle may slip off of the jack.
Warning! G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi-
cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle. Never lie down under the raised ve-
hicle. Do not start the engine when the vehi-
cle is raised.
421
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
1Alignment bolt
왘Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
and remove.
왘Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘Remove the remaining bolts.
왘Remove the wheel.
Mounting the Minispare wheel
왘Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
왘Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while in-
stalling first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
422
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
rarily use the Minispare wheel when ob-
serving the following restrictions:
앫Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
앫Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate.
앫Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Lowering the vehicle
왘Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
ly on its own weight.
왘Remove the jack.
1-5 Wheel bolts
왘Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
Warning! G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi-
fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
rarily, and replaced with a regular road
wheel as quickly as possible.
423
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Before storing the jack in the cargo
compartment, it should be fully col-
lapsed.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
i
Wrap the damaged wheel in the protec-
tive film that comes with the spare
wheel and put the wheel in the cargo
compartment.
Do not activate the tire inflation pres-
sure monitor until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
424
Practical hints
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-
ies:
앫Main battery (battery for starter and
electrical consumers; located in the
cargo compartment).
앫Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; sta-
bilizes the electrical system if the main
battery is discharged; located in the en-
gine compartment).
왘Pull cover up and detach it.
1Negative terminal
2Positive terminal
i
The battery is located on the right-hand
side under a cover.
Warning! G
Jump starting must only be done using the
designated terminal connections in the en-
gine compartment (컄page 429).
425
Practical hints
Batteries
Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
sult in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄page 305).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery termi-
nal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be se-
verely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for main-
tenance intervals or contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning! G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Warning! G
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake sys-
tem operation and switch it into its emer-
gency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking ef-
fect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is in-
creased! Adjust your driving style according-
ly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake
system” (컄page 92).
426
Practical hints
Batteries
Disconnecting the battery
왘Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘Open the driver’s door.
왘Open the tailgate.
왘Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄page 425).
왘Access the cargo compartment under-
neath the third row seat cushions and
footwell (컄page 401).
왘Remove cover to access battery
(컄page 424).
왘Disconnect battery negative lead 1.
왘Remove cover 2 from the positive ter-
minal.
왘Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the battery
왘Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.
왘Remove the battery bracket.
왘Take out the battery.
Warning! G
With a disconnected battery
앫you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
앫the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
427
Practical hints
Batteries
Charging and reinstalling the battery
왘Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.
Reconnecting the battery
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
왘Connect the negative lead.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Warning! G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the bat-
tery in its installed position. Contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability. Charge battery
in accordance with the instructions for the
accessory battery charger*.
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
i
The following procedures must be car-
ried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
tion):
앫Set the clock (컄page 167)
(see COMAND operator’s manual).
앫Resynchronize the ESP
(컄page 367).
앫Resynchronize the side windows
(컄page 223).
앫Resynchronize the tilt/sliding sun-
roof* (컄page 227).
428
Practical hints
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
ing:
앫Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold.
앫Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start-
ing with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!
Jump starting of the main battery must
only be done using the designated
jump start terminals located in the
engine compartment (컄page 429).
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine us-
ing a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
429
Practical hints
Jump starting
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment.
왘Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Apply parking brake.
왘Shift gear selector lever to position P.
1Negative (-) terminal
2Cover of Positive (+) terminal
왘Open cover 2 of the positive terminal
of both vehicles.
왘Connect positive terminal 2 and the
positive terminal of the charged battery
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to
charged battery first.
왘Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘Connect negative terminal 1 and the
negative terminal of the charged
battery with the jumper cable. Clamp
cable to charged battery first.
왘Start the engine of the disabled
vehicle.
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 1 and then from
the positive terminals 2.
Now you can turn on the lights.
왘Have the battery checked at the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄page 305).
!
Never invert the terminal connections!
i
The message
Malfunction - electric
consumers switched off
may appear
in the instrument cluster. It will disap-
pear as soon as the battery is suffi-
ciently charged.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
430
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi-
cle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref-
erable to other types of towing.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised (except vehi-
cles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary
to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca-
tion where the recommended towing
methods can be employed.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the
automatic central locking.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing
so could damage the transfer case,
which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
Observe instructions for towing the ve-
hicle with all wheels on the ground.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
immediately be engaged and will apply
the rear wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
431
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the drive train, however, we
recommend the drive shaft be discon-
nected at the rear axle drive flange (ve-
hicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for
any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning! G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫the engine will not run
앫there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system
앫there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
trol the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re-
move SmartKey from starter switch and re-
insert.
Warning! G
The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake sys-
tem operation and switch it into its emer-
gency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking ef-
fect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is in-
creased! Adapt your driving style according-
ly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake
system” (컄page 92).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering system. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
essary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driv-
ing accordingly.
432
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combina-
tion switch for the left or right turn sig-
nal in the usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
ard warning flasher will operate again.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the follow-
ing:
With the automatic central locking acti-
vated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 2, the ve-
hicle doors lock if the left front wheel
as well as the right rear wheel are turn-
ing at vehicle speeds of approximately
9mph (15km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄page 99).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking (컄page 122).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas-
sis, frame or suspension parts.
i
The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not
turn in the starter switch if the battery
is disconnected or discharged. For
more information, see “Battery”
(컄page 424) and “Jump starting”
(컄page 428).
For information on manual unlocking of
the transmission selector lever, see
(컄page 405).
433
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle
1Cover on right side of front bumper
To remove cover:
왘Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
row.
왘Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the cargo compartment floor).
왘Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘Fit cover and snap into place.
Rear of vehicle
2Cover on right side of rear bumper
To remove cover:
왘Pull cover in the direction of the arrow.
왘Fold cover down to reveal threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the cargo compartment floor).
왘Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘Fit cover and snap into place.
434
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses are designed to protect the electri-
cal circuits in your vehicle from a short cir-
cuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s)
and systems controlled by that fuse will
stop working.
The following aids are available to help you
change fuses (컄page 434):
앫Fuse chart
앫Spare fuses
앫Fuse extractor
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫Fuse box in passenger compartment
(컄page 435)
앫Fuse box in cargo compartment
(컄page 435)
Aids for replacing fuses
Fuse chart
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment (컄page 435).
The amperages of the fuses are also given
there.
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
in the cargo compartment (컄page 403).
Fuse extractor
The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle
tool kit in the cargo compartment
(컄page 403).
Warning! G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
and which have the specified amperage rat-
ing. Using other fuses may cause an over-
load and lead to a fire, or cause damage to
electrical components and/or systems.
!
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage
rating.
Otherwise, electrical parts or systems
could be damaged.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
435
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
1Recess in the cover
2Cover
Opening
왘Open the driver’s door.
왘Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in
recess 1 on the edge of cover 2.
왘Loosen cover 2 from the dashboard
using lever.
왘Using your hands, pull cover 2 in the
direction of the arrow and remove.
Closing
왘Hook cover 2 into the opening at the
front.
왘Press cover 2 back on until it engag-
es.
Fuse box in cargo compartment
The fuse box is located in the cargo com-
partment behind the left-hand trim panel.
1Trim panel
2Button for unlocking trim panel
Opening trim panel
왘Press button 2.
왘Fold down trim panel 1.
Closing trim panel
왘Fold up trim panel 1.
!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box
cover 2 in the dashboard, as this
could damage it.
436
437
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
438
Technical data
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte-
nance and repair work. In addition, strate-
gically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different parts for Mer-
cedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
bility or safety.
439
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex-
change or repair any defective parts origi-
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫New Car Limited Warranty
앫Emission System Warranty
앫Emission Performance Warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories Warranties, copies of which
are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
placement. It will be mailed to you.
440
Technical data
Identification labels
1Driver’s door B-pillar with Certification
labels (includes Paintwork code)
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3Vacuum line routing diagram label
4Engine number (engraved on engine)
5Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(lower edge of windshield)
6Emission control information label, in-
cludes both federal and California cer-
tification exhaust emission standards
i
When ordering parts, please specify ve-
hicle identification and engine num-
bers.
441
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔Layout of poly-V-belt drive
E320/E500
1Automatic belt tensioner
2Power steering pump
3Air conditioning compressor
4Crankshaft
5Coolant pump
6Generator (alternator)
7Idler pulley
442
Technical data
Engine
Model E 320 (211.2651)
E 320 4MATIC (211.2821)
1The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
E 5002 (211.2701)
E 500 4MATIC (211.2831)
2Not available in the U.S.
Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm3)303.0 cu.in. (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 221 hp/5600 rpm3
(165 kW/5600 rpm)
3Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
302 hp/5600 rpm3
(225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 232 lb-ft/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm)
339 lb-ft/ 2700 rpm - 4250 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2390 mm 2390 mm
443
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as:
앫Poor handling characteristics
앫Increased noise
앫Increased fuel consumption
!
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex-
hibit dimensional variations and differ-
ent tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
i
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sures is located on the on the driver’s
door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information
for driving at high speeds (컄page 317)
or for vehicle loads less than the maxi-
mum loaded vehicle condition. If such
information is provided, it can be found
on the placard located on the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow the tire
manufacturer’s maintenance recom-
mendation included with the vehicle.
444
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
16’’ tires
17’’ tires
E 320/E 320 4MATIC
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16 H2
Wheel offset 1.42 in (36 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) -
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R16 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) -
E320/E500
1
(Appearance Package*)
1Not available in the U.S.
E500
1/E 500 4MATIC E 320 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC
(Appearance Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 H2 8 J x 17 H2 8 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95H - -
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S
445
Technical data
Rims and tires
18’’ tires
Mixed size tires
E3204MATIC (Sport Package*)
E5004MATIC (Sport Package*)
AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18 EH2
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/ 40 R18 97Y XL (Extra Load)
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) -
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) -
E 320/E 5001 (Sport Package*)
1Not available in the U.S.
Front axle: AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18 EH2
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 ZR18
Rear axle: AMG light alloy rims 9 J x 18 EH2
Wheel offset 1.54 in (39 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/35 ZR18 XL (Extra Load) M02
2Must not be used with snow chains.
446
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel
E320/E3204MATIC
E500
1/E 500 4MATIC
1Not available in the U.S.
Rim 4 B x 17
Wheel offset 1.34 (34 mm)
Tire T 155/70 R17 110 M2
2Must not be used with snow chains.
i
Please note that the tire pressure of the
Minispare differs from the tire pressure
of the road tires.
Make sure the Minispare wheel is in-
flated to approx. 61 psi (4.2 bar).
447
Technical data
Electrical system
왔Electrical system
Model E320/E3204MATIC E 5001/E 500 4MATIC
1Not available in the U.S.
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/ 150 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.4 kW 14 V/ 1.7 kW
Battery (auxiliary) 12 V/12 Ah 12 V/12 Ah
Battery (main) 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11
Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm)
Tightening torque 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
448
Technical data
Main dimensions
Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E500
1/E 500 4MATIC
1not available in the U.S.
Overall vehicle length 191.7 in (4868 mm) 191.7 in (4868 mm)
Overall vehicle width 71.7 in (1822 mm) 71.7 in (1822 mm)
Overall vehicle height 58.9 in (1495 mm)
Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC*)
(optional with E 320 Appearance Pack-
age*; standard on E 500)
58.5 in (1485 mm) 58.5 in (1485 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 61.4 in (1559 mm) 61.7 in (1567 mm)
Track, rear 61.1 in (1552 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm)
449
Technical data
Weights
왔Weights
Roof load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
450
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
products tested and approved by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
vice Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter E320 / E3204MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
E500
1 / E 500 4MATIC
1Not available in the U.S.
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
Automatic transmission 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Front axle E3204MATIC /
E5004MATIC
0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Rear axle E320 / E3204MATIC 1.06 US qt (1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E500
1 / E 500 4MATIC 1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
Transfer case E3204MATIC /
E5004MATIC
0.62 US qt (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Fluid
451
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 1.1 US qt (1.05 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 10.7 US qt (10 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 5001/ E 500 4MATIC
1Not available in the U.S.
11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
21.12 US gal (80.0 l)
2.38 US gal (9.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96
RON/86 MON)
452
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lu-
bricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
1Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄page 458).
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning
system
7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
453
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters re-
quired for vehicles with Maintenance Sys-
tem (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Ap-
proved Service Products pamphlet, or con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica-
tion other than those expressly required
for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehi-
cles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or
changing of oil and oil filter at change inter-
vals longer than those called for by the
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in
engine damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System (U.S.
vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
recommendations for scheduled oil chang-
es. Failure to do so could result in engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
ing system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
ous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bub-
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid
must be replaced every two years, prefera-
bly in the spring.Only brake fluid approved
by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
vide you with additional information.
454
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
its.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
gine performance problems such as:
앫Warm-up hesitation
앫Unstable idle
앫Knocking/pinging
앫Misfire
앫Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be en-
countered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products Pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow di-
rections on product label.
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine op-
eration.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending addition-
al fuel additives other than those tested
and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Fac-
tory Approved Service Products pamphlet
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gaso-
line must be used. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available and low octane
fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible
앫Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration
앫Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two per-
sons and no luggage
앫Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain
455
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439:
앫The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 “min”. It is an aver-
age of both the Research (R) Octane
Number and the Motor (M) Octane
Number: (R+M) /2). This is also known
as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
앫Corrosion protection
앫Freeze protection
앫Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro-
sion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corro-
sion protection and increase boil-over pro-
tection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
replacement interval.
456
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solu-
tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pam-
phlet) are used to renew the coolant con-
centration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approximately - 49°F
(-45°C)], the engine temperature will in-
crease due to the lower heat transfer capa-
bility of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cool-
ing system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accor-
dance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion /antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
nents in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use
such anticorrosion /antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service
life).
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
457
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
E 320/E 320 4MATIC 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E500
1/E 500 4MATIC 6.0 US qt (5.65 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
1not available in the U.S.
458
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately:
앫7.4 US qt. (7 l) in vehicles with a
headlamp cleaning system* or heated
reservoir
앫4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) in vehicles without a
headlamp cleaning system
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con-
centrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
bient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫1 part “S” to100 parts water
(1.34floz [40ml]“S” to 1gallon [4l]
water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34floz [40ml]“S” to 1gallon [4l]
solvent)
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
mable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts,
because it may ignite and burn. You can be
seriously burned.
459
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
(컄page 332)
ADS
(Adaptive Damping System)
Automatically adapts the optimum sus-
pension damping to prevailing driving
conditions.
Air pressure
(컄page 332)
Airmatic DC
(Airmatic Dual Control)
Automatically selects the optimum sus-
pension tuning and ride height for your
vehicle. Airmatic consists of two com-
ponents:
앫Adaptive Damping System
앫Vehicle level control
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
Aspect ratio
(컄page 332)
Bar
(컄page 333)
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situa-
tions. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bead
(컄page 333)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
a light source and produce a more in-
tense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
ter which can help you with any ques-
tions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a break-
down.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control ve-
hicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
ger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
Cold tire inflation pressure
(컄page 333)
460
Technical terms
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data Sys-
tem)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navi-
gation system, as well as other optional
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to ad-
just settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for auto-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
앫If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise con-
trol.
앫If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by re-
duced throttle and up to 20% brak-
ing power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance.
DOT
(Department of Transportation)
(컄page 333)
DTR
(->Distronic*)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro-
duced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
tures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tol-
erate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and direc-
tional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
461
Technical terms
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
(Flexible Service System PLUS)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle mainte-
nance service is due. FSS evaluates en-
gine temperature, oil level, vehicle
speed, engine speed, distance driven
and the time elapsed since your last
service, calculates other maintenance
service work required, and calls for the
next maintenance service accordingly.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(컄page 333)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special re-
ceivers. Employs DVD digital maps for
navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
(컄page 333)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
(컄page 333)
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer
and fuel gauge.
KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmis-
sion down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
cle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Kilopascal (kPa)
(컄page 333)
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or un-
locked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
462
Technical terms
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle mainte-
nance service is due. The Vehicle Main-
tenance System in your vehicle tracks
distance driven and the time elapsed
since your last maintenance service,
calculates other maintenance service
work required, and calls for the next
maintenance service accordingly.
Maximum load rating
(컄page 333)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄page 333)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄page 334)
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirror posi-
tions for each SmartKey.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized meth-
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
The display field in the instrument clus-
ter used to present information provid-
ed by the control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operat-
ing the control system.
Normal occupant weight
(컄page 334)
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
gine speed range, as it may result in se-
rious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
463
Technical terms
Power train
Collective term designating all compo-
nents used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, includ-
ing:
앫Engine
앫Clutch/torque converter
앫Transmission
앫Transfer case*
앫Drive shaft
앫Axle shafts/axles
Production options weight
(컄page 334)
PSI
(Pounds per square inch)
(컄page 334)
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmis-
sion between standard operation S and
operation C.
E 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift
control and manual shift program: in
addition to S and C (for sporty S or
comfortable C operation), you can use
M for manual shift program.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and
child restraint systems. As indepen-
dent systems, their protective func-
tions complement one another.
Rim
(컄page 334)
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gaso-
line as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gaso-
line's ability to resist undesired detona-
tion (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
SBC
(Sensotronic Brake Control)
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector le-
ver from being moved out of position P
without the ignition or engine on and
brake pedal depressed.
464
Technical terms
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
vice and air bags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
mand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and man-
ual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
tivated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
vided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not dam-
aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecom-
munications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄page 334)
Tire load rating
(컄page 334)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄page 334)
Tire speed rating
(컄page 335)
Traction
(컄page 335)
Tread
(컄page 335)
Treadwear indicators
(컄page 335)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄page 335)
Vehicle capacity weight
(컄page 335)
Vehicle level control
The ground clearance of the vehicle is
automatically controlled according to a
selected setting and speed.The driver
can set the ground clearance manually
for example on very rough roads.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄page 335)
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
465
Index
A
ABS 87, 459
ABS control 87
Malfunction indicator lamp 352
Messages in display 364
Warning lamp 352
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission* 189
Accessory weight 332
Accident
In case of 55
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 206, 218
Air recirculation mode 204, 216
Anti-theft alarm system 98
Automatic climate control
(4-zone*) 213
Automatic climate control
(Dual-zone) 201
Central locking (control system) 174
Climate control 198, 199
Defrosting 203, 215
Distance warning function* 241
Distronic* 237
Easy-entry/exit feature* 175
ESP 92
Exterior headlamps 51
Exterior lamps 142
Fog lamps 144
Hazard warning flasher 146
Headlamps 51
Ignition 34
Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 36
Immobilizer 57, 97
Rear window defroster 195
Residual heat 207, 219
Seat heater* 132
Tow-away alarm 99
Windshield wipers 52
Activating intermitted wipe 54
Activating intermittent wipe 54
Adding
Engine oil 302
Additional turn signal 411
Adjustable air vents, rear passenger
compartment 219
Adjusting 38
Air distribution 214
Air volume 202, 215
Backrest tilt 39
Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour
features 130
Exterior rear view mirror 42
Head restraint height 40, 128
Head restraint tilt 40
Instrument cluster illumination 150
Interior rear view mirror 42
Mirrors 41
Rear head restraints 129
Seat cushion tilt 39
Seat fore and aft adjustment 39
Seat height 39
Seats 38
Steering column height 41
Steering wheel 40
Adjusting seat backrest position 249
Adjusting steering column in or out 41
Adjusting steering column up or down 41
Adjusting the dynamic seat 177
Air conditioning (cooling)
Turning off 206, 218
Turning on 206, 218
Air distribution
Adjusting 201, 214
Air pressure 332
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 318
466
Index
Air recirculation mode 204, 216
Activating 204, 216
Deactivating 205, 217
Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 219
Air volume
Adjusting 202, 215
Airbags 63
Children 64
Front 67
Passenger 67
Safety guidelines 66
Side impact 68
Window curtain 68
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* 244
Alarm
Audible 86, 99
Canceling 99
Visual 98
Alarm system
Anti-theft 98
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 403,
421, 459
Ambient lighting 149
Antilock brake system (ABS) 459
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 98
Canceling alarm 99
Disarming 98
Anti-theft systems 97
Anti-theft alarm system 98
Immobilizer 97
Tow-away alarm 99
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 289
Ashtray 265
Aspect ratio 332
At the gas station 296
AUDIO menu 158
Selecting radio station 158
Selecting satellite radio* station 159
Audio system
CD mode 159
Auto-dimming mirror 191
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control
system) 174
Automatic climate control (4-zone*) 208
Adjusting air distribution 214
Adjusting air volume 215
Air conditioning 218
Air recirculation mode 216
Deactivating 213
Defrosting 215
Residual heat utilization 219
Residual ventilation 219
Setting the temperature 214
Automatic climate control
(Dual-zone) 196
Adjusting air distribution 201
Adjusting air volume 202
Air conditioning 206
Air recirculation mode 204
Deactivating 201
Defrosting 203
Residual heat utilization 207
Residual ventilation 207
Setting the temperature 201
Automatic headlamp mode 142
Automatic lighting control
Activating 147
Deactivating 147
Automatic locking when driving 122
467
Index
Automatic transmission 183
Comfort program mode 188
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 190
Gear ranges 186
Gear selector lever position 187
Gear shifting malfunctions 190
Manual shifting 185
One-touch gearshifting 185
Program mode selector switch 188
Selector lever position 183
Starting the engine 47
Automatic transmission*
Accelerator position 189
Kickdown 189
B
Backrest
Folding forward 247
Folding rearward 248
Bar 333
BAS 89, 459
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 408, 409
Check lamp 105, 111
Checking 106, 112
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing 408, 409
Batteries, vehicle
Charging 427
Disconnecting 426
Reconnecting 427
Removing 426
Service 424
Battery discharged
Jump starting 428
Bead 333
Belt reel 254
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 459
Block heater* 338
Blocking
Rear window operation 84
Brake assist system (BAS) 459
Brake fluid 297, 377
Brake pads
Message in display 375
Brakes
Brake fluid 298
Warning lamp 354
Break-in period 284
Bulbs, replacing
Additional turn signals 410
Fog lamps 410
Front lamps 410, 413
High beam 411
High mounted brake lamp 411
License plate lamps 411, 415
Low beam 411
Parking lamps 411
Side marker lamps 410, 415
Standing lamps 411
Tail lamp 411
Tail lamp assemblies 415
Turn signal lamp 410
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 459
Calling up
Distronic* settings 160
Maintenance service indicator 341
Range (distance to empty) 179
CAN system 459
Cargo compartment
Fuse box 435
Cargo compartment cover 257
Cargo management system* 252
Cargo net 256
468
Index
Cargo tie-down rings 251
CD player
Operating 159
Center console
Lower part 28
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 360
Upper part 27
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 165
Central locking
From inside 122
Switch 122
Switching on/off (control
system) 174
Unlocking from inside 122
Central locking switch 122
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*) 408, 409
Batteries (SmartKey) 408, 409
SmartKey setting 175
Vehicle level 246
Charging
Vehicle batteries 427
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 355
Checking
Coolant level 303
Oil level 297, 300
Tire inflation pressure 297
Vehicle lighting 297
Child safety 73
Airbags 64
Infant and child restraint systems 69,
73
LATCH child seat anchors 83
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
window operation 84
Cigarette lighter 266
Cleaning
Headlamps 191
Windshield 53
Wood trims 350
Cleaning tires 309
Clock 168
Closing
Glove box 259
Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225
Side windows 222
Tailgate
Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 119,
121
Windows 221
Closing the tailgate 117, 119, 121
Closing the tailgate from the outside (vehi-
cles without KEYLESS-GO*) 118
Cockpit 22, 459
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND) 460
Cold tire inflation pressure 333
Collapsible wheel chock 403
COMAND 460
COMAND* see separate operating instruc-
tions
Combination switch 145
Turn signals 51
Windshield wipers 52
Comfort driving
Transmission program mode 188
469
Index
Control system 153, 460
AUDIO menu 158
Convenience submenu 175
Display digital speedometer 158
Distronic* menu 160
Functions 157
Instrument cluster submenu 165,
167
Lighting submenu 170
Menus 156, 157
Multifunction display 153
Multifunction steering wheel 154
Selecting radio system 158
Selecting satellite radio* system 159
Settings menu 162
Standard display menu 158
Submenus 155, 157
TEL* menu 179
Trip computer menu 178
Vehicle status message memory
menu 161
Vehicle submenu 174
Convenience submenu 175
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature* 175
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 176
Setting SmartKey-dependency 176
Coolant
Adding water 298
Checking level 303
Messages in display 378, 379, 380
Warning lamp 356
Coolant temperature 295
Cruise control 228, 460
Canceling 230
Driving downhill 229
Driving uphill 229
Fine adjustment 231
Lever 236
Saving current speed 229
Setting speeds 231
Cruise control lever 228
Cup holder in the center console 262,
264
Cup holders 262
Curb weight 333
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 459
D
Daytime running lamp mode 143
Setting 170
Deactivating 213
Air conditioning (cooling) 206
Air recirculation mode 205, 217
Alarm 98
Anti-theft alarm system 98
Automatic climate control
(Dual-zone) 201
Central locking (control system) 174
Climate control 198, 199
Cruise control 230
Defrosting 203, 216
Distance warning function* 241
Distronic* 239
Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 59
Engine with the SmartKey 57
ESP 91
Exterior lamps 142
Hazard warning flasher 146
Headlamps 57
Immobilizer 97
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 173
Rear window defroster 195
470
Index
Residual heat 207, 219
Seat heater* 132
Seat ventilation* 133
Tow-away alarm 100
Deactivating intermittent wipe 54
Deceleration
With Distronic* 235
Defogging
Windshield 202, 203, 215
Defrosting 203, 215
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 173
Department of Transportation see DOT
Dialing
A number (telephone) 181
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 55
With starting 49
Digital speedometer 158
Direction of rotation (tires) 310
Discharged battery
Jump starting 428
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 426
Display
Selecting 166, 167
Displays
Digital speedometer 158
Distronic* 234
Maintenance service indicator 339
Messages 301
Selecting 166
Showing malfunctions 161
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 240
Increasing in Distronic* 240
Warning function 240
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 178
Distance warning function* 240
Activating 241
Deactivating 241
DTR* warning lamp 240
Intermittent warning sound 240
Symbol in multifunction display 160
Distronic* 232, 460
Activated 236
Activating 237
Calling up settings 160, 235
Cleaning system sensor 347
Cruise control lever 236
Deactivated 236
Deactivating 239
Deceleration 235
Decreasing distance 240
Displays in the speedometer dial 234
Distance warning function 240
Driving hints 241
Increasing distance 240
Intermittent signal tone 234
Menu 235
Messages in display 365
Sensor cover 347
Setting a higher speed 237
Setting a slower speed 238
Setting the current speed 237
Setting the following distance in
Distronic 239
Warning and indicator lamps 234
Door control panel 30
Door entry lamps 149
Door handle 30
Door unlock
With Tele Aid* 276
471
Index
Doors
Message in display 381
Opening from inside vehicle 114
Opening from outside 110
DOT 333, 460
Downhill driving
Cruise control 229
Downshifting 185
Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour
features 130
Driving
General instructions 44
Hydroplaning 289
In winter 291
Problems 55
Safety systems 87
With Distronic* 241
Driving hints
SBC brake system 95
Driving instructions 285
Driving off 288
Driving safety systems
4MATIC 95
ABS 87
BAS 89
ESP 89, 460
SBC brake system 92
Driving systems 228
Airmatic DC* 244
Cruise control 228
Distronic* 232
Driving safety systems 87
Vehicle level control 245
DTR see Distronic* 460
Dual control*
Airmatic DC* 244
Dual-zone automatic climate control 196
E
Easy-entry/exit
Message in display 376
Easy-entry/exit feature* 124
Activating 175
Interrupting movement 124, 175
Electrical fuses 434
Electrical system 447
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 89,
460
Emergency call system* 270
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 272
With Tele Aid* 271
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 190
Emergency operations
Opening/closing Sliding/pop-up
roof* 407
Remote door unlock 276
Unlocking the vehicle 404
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 72, 460
Emission control 294
Ending
A call (telephone) 181
Engine 442
Compartment 299
Message in the display 355, 378
Starting 47
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 48, 54
Starting with the SmartKey 47
Turning off the engine with the
SmartKey 57
Engine compartment
Hood 299
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 355,
378
Engine number 460
472
Index
Engine oil
Adding 302
Checking level 300
Consumption 300
Display messages 382
Messages in display 301
Viscosity 460
ESP 89, 460
Four wheel electronic traction system
with ESP 95
Switching off 91
Switching on 92
Synchronizing 367
Warning lamp 353
ETD 460
Safety guidelines 66
Exterior lamp switch 141
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 42
Parking position for 176
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 165
Fastening the seat belts 44
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 231
First aid kit 401
Flat tire 418
Mounting the spare wheel 419
Spare wheel 419
Flexible Service System (FSS) 461
Floormats 268
Fog lamp, rear 145
Fog lamps
Switching on 144
Fog lamps, front
Messages in display 386
Switching on 144
Folding back folding bench seat 136
Folding bench seat in cargo
compartment 134
Folding head restraints back 127
Following distance in Distronic* 239
Four wheel electronic traction system
(4MATIC) with ESP 95
4MATIC 95
4-zone automatic climate control* 208
Front airbags 67
Front doors
Opening from inside vehicle 115
Front fog lamp
Replacing bulb 411
Front interior lighting 148
Front lamps 411
Messages in display 387
Replacing bulbs 413
Switching on 141
Front reading lamps
Switching on/off 148
Front seat head restraints
Power seat 126
Removing and installing 126
Front seats
Heater* 132
FSS (Flexible Service System) 461
Fuel 297
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 357
Premium unleaded gasoline 297
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 178
Since last reset 178
Fuel filler flap 296
Locking 296
Unlocking 296
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 385
Fuel tank
Filler flap 296
473
Index
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 450
Functions (control system) 157
Resetting 163
Fuse box
Passenger compartment 435
Fuse box in cargo compartment 435
Fuse chart 434
Fuses 434
Fuse chart 434
Fuse extractor 434
Spare fuses 434
G
Garage door opener 29, 277
Erasing the integrated remote
control 282
Integrated remote control 279
Rolling code programming 280
Gasoline see Fuel 297
GAWR 333
Gear range 461
Automatic transmission 186
Limiting 186
Shifting into optimal 185
Gear range limit
Canceling 185
Gear selector lever
Position 187
Global
Locking 104
Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 110
Unlocking 104
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 110
Global Positioning System (GPS) 461
Glove box 259
Closing 259
Opening 259
Good visibility 191
GPS 461
GPS see COMAND 270
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 333
GVWR 333
H
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 279
Reprogramming integrated remote
control 282
Hazard warning flasher 146
Switching off 146
Switching on 146
Headlamps
Automatic control 142
Bi-Xenon* 459
Cleaning system* 191
Switching off 57
Switching on 51
Heated seats* 132
Heated steering wheel* 267
Height adjustment
Head restraints 40, 128
Steering wheel 40
Vehicle level 245
High beam flasher 145
High beam headlamps 51
Activating 145
Messages in display 387
Replacing bulbs 411
Switching on 145
Hood 299
Closing 299
Message in display 384
Opening 299
Hydroplaning 289
474
Index
I
Identification labels 440
Ignition 34, 36
Switching on 47, 48, 54
Immobilizer 97
Activating 97
Deactivating 97
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems 73
Installing 82
LATCH child seat anchors 83
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid* 274
Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the
mounting element 253
Inserting the mounting elements into the
cargo rails 252
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 191
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 82
Towing eye bolt 433
Wiper blades 417
Installing the storage box 256
Instrument cluster 24, 150, 349, 461
Coolant
Temperature indicator 151
Illumination 150
Multifunction display 153
Outside temperature indicator 152
Selecting language 166
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 281
Erasing memory 282
Gate operator 281
Hand-held transmitter 279
Operation 282
Rolling code programming 280
Interior lighting 147
Activating automatic control 147
Deactivating automatic control 147
Delayed switch-off 173
Manual operation 148
Interior lighting in the rear 149
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 42
Interior storage spaces
Glove box 259
J
Jack 402
Jump starting 428
K
Key, Mechanical 404
Key, SmartKey
Changing the batteries 408, 409
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing the batteries 408, 409
KEYLESS-GO* 461
Activating ignition with 36
Closing
Tailgate 119, 121
Factory setting 110
Global locking 110
Global unlocking 110
Important notes 108
Locking the vehicle 113
Opening the tailgate 112
Remote control 107
Starting the engine 48, 54
Turning off engine 59
Unlocking the tailgate 112
Unlocking with 33
Kickdown 189, 461
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 165
475
Index
Kilopascal 333
Km/h or mph in speedometer 165
L
Lamp bulbs, exterior 410
Lamps, exterior
Front 411
Light sensor 387
Messages in display 387
Replacing bulbs for rear 411, 415
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 352
Airbag Off 68
Battery (SmartKey) 104, 111
Brakes 354
CHECK ENGINE 355
Coolant 356
DTR* 234
Engine diagnostics 355
ESP 353
Fuel reserve 355
SBC 92
Seat belts 355, 357
SRS 63
Language
Multifunction display 166
Setting 166
LATCH child seat anchors 83
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 441
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 350
Level control system*
Airmatic DC* 244
Lever
For cruise control 236
License plate lamps 411
Messages in display 387
Replacing bulbs 415
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 348
Light sensor 387
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 266
Lighting 141
Automatic headlamp mode 142
Daytime running lamp mode 143
Door entry lamps 149
Exterior lamp switch 141
Fog lamps 144
Front fog lamps 144
High beams 145
Instrument cluster illumination 150
Interior 147
Interior in the rear 149
Locator lighting 144
Low beam 141
Manual headlamp mode 142
Night security illumination 144
Parking lamps 141
Settings (control system) 170
Limiting the gear range 186
Limp Home Mode 190
Loading 247
Instructions 250
Split rear bench seat* 247
Loading terminology 332
Loading the storage box 256
Loading the vehicle 310
Locator lighting 144
Setting 171
Lock button 461
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 60
Locking 56, 102
Fuel filler flap 296
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 110
Global, SmartKey 104
The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 113
Vehicle in an emergency 405
Loss of SmartKey 106
Loss of SmartKeys 114
476
Index
Low beam headlamps 51
Messages in display 387
Replacing bulbs 410, 411
Lowering
Vehicle 422
M
Main Dimensions 448
Maintenance 12
Maintenance service
Maintenance service data
information 343
Overdue 340
Resetting maintenance service
indicator 341
When due 339
Maintenance service indicator 339
Calling up 341
Clearing 340
Resetting 341
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 462
Malfunction
Displaying 161
Manual headlamp mode 142
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 405
Interior lighting control 148
Sliding/pop-up roof* 407
Unlocking the driver’s door 404
Unlocking the gear selector
lever 405
Massage function 131
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 216
Maximum inflation pressure 334
Maximum load rating 333
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 333
Mechanical key 404
Memory function 138, 462
Recalling positions from
memory 139
Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing positions 140
Storing SmartKey dependent
settings 139
Menus 156
AUDIO 158
Distronic* 160, 235
In control system 156, 157
Settings menu 162
Standard display 158
Submenus 155
TEL* 179
Trip computer 178
Vehicle status message memory 161
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 165
Minispare wheel
Mounting 421
Mirrors
Adjusting 41
Auto-dimming for rear view
mirrors 191
Auto-dimming mirror 191
Exterior rear view mirror 42
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 176, 192
Interior rear view mirror 42
Storing exterior mirror parking
position 140
MON 297
MON (Motor Octane Number) 462
Mph or km/h in speedometer 165
Multifunction display 153, 462
Selecting language 166
Standard display 157
477
Index
Multifunction display messages
ABS 364
Brake fluid 377
Brake pads 375
Check engine 355
Coolant 379, 380
Coolant level 378
Distronic* 365
Doors 381
Easy-entry/exit feature 376
Fuel reserve tank 385
Hood 384
Lamps 387
Parking brake 376
SBC brake system 375, 376
SmartKey 385
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 384
Tailgate 399
Tele Aid 397, 398
Telephone* 399
Tires 392
Washer fluid 399
Multifunction steering wheel 26, 154,
462
Buttons 154
N
Navigation system
See separate COMAND operating
instructions 160
Night security illumination 144
Normal occupant weight 334
O
Occupant Classification System 76
Self-test 81
Occupant distribution 334
Occupant safety 62
Airbags 63
Children and airbags 64
Children in the vehicle 73
Fastening the seat belt 44
Infant and child restraint systems 73
LATCH child seat anchors 83
Seat belts 44, 66
Oil
Adding 302
Checking level with the control
system 301
Consumption 300
Filler neck 302
Viscosity 460
Oil level
Checking level with the control
system 301
One-touch gearshifting 185
Canceling gear range limit 185
Downshifting 185
Upshifting 185
Opening 407
Ashtray 265
Doors from the inside 114
Front doors from the inside 115
Fuel filler flap 296
Fuel filler flap manually 405
Glove box 259
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 407
Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225
Rear doors from the inside 115
Side windows 222
Sliding/pop-up roof* in an
emergency 407
Tailgate 115
Windows 221
Opening the tailgate from the inside
automatically* 116
478
Index
Opening the tailgate from the inside with
handle 116
Operating
CD player 159
Radio 158
Safety 16
Telephone* 179
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 13
Operating safety 16
Operation
Garage door opener 282
Integrated remote control 282
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 347
Outer seats
Rear seat head restraints 129
Outside temperature indicator 152
Overhead control panel 29
Garage door opener 277
Overspeed range 462
P
Paintwork 346
Panic alarm 86
Panic button on SmartKey 86
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 259
Parking 56
Parking brake 49, 56
Engaging 56
Message in display 376
Releasing 49
Parking lamps 411
Switching on 141
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 140, 176,
192
Parts service 438
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 360
Passenger compartment
Fuse box 435
Interior lighting 147
Interior rear view mirror 42
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 62
Pedals 285
Phone book*
Loading 181
Quick search 181
Phone number*
Dialing 181
Redialing 181
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 350
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 403
Poly-V-belt drive 462
Positions (Memory function)
Recalling from memory 139
Positions (Memory function*)
Storing in memory 139
Potential problems associated with under-
inflated and overinflated tires 322
Power assistance 286
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 39
Adjusting head restraint height 40
Adjusting head restraint tilt 40
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 39
Adjusting seat height 39
Memory function 138
Removing/installing head
restraints 126
Seat fore and aft adjustment 39
479
Index
Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 225
Closing 225
Opening 225
Stopping 227
Power tilt /sliding sunroof**
Synchronizing 227
Power train 463
Power washer 345
Power windows 221
Blocking of rear window operation 84
Convenience closing feature 224
Summer opening feature 223
Synchronizing 223
Practical hints
Collapsible wheel chock 403
First aid kit 401
Jump starting 428
Lamp in center console 360
Lamps in instrument cluster 352
Spare wheel 402
Vehicle status messages in the multi-
function display 362
Vehicle tool kit 403
Problems
While driving 55
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 334
Program mode selector switch 463
Automatic transmission 188
PSI 334
PULSE function (Massage function) 131
Q
Quick search
Phone book* 181
R
Radio
Selecting stations 158
Selecting stations (satellite*) 159
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 293
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 179
Rear bench seat
Foldable 247
Rear doors
Opening from inside vehicle 115
Rear fog lamp
Bulb 410
Switching on 145
Rear interior lighting 148
Rear lamp bulbs 411
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear outer seats
Adjusting head restraint height 128
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air vents 219
Rear reading lamps 149
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting manually 129
Folding back manually 127
Folding back with switch in the center
console 127
Installing 130
Outer seats 129
Removing 129
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors 191
Rear window
Blocking operation 84
Rear window defroster 195
Activating 195
Deactivating 195
Rear window sunshade* 194
Recommended inflation pressure 334
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 427
480
Index
Recovery services
For stolen vehicle 277
Regular checks 297
Reinstalling the battery 427
Remote control
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 107
Remote controls
Integrated 279
SmartKey 102, 107
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid* 276
Removing
Vehicle battery 426
Wheel 421
Wiper blades 417
Removing and installing
Front seat head restraints 126
Removing and installing seat
cushions 136
Removing the storage box 256
Removing the twin roller blind 258
Replacing
Bulbs 410
Front lamp bulbs 413
Fuses 434
License plate lamp bulbs 415
Rear lamp bulbs 411, 415
Side marker lamp bulb 415
Wiper blades 416
Reporting
Safety defects 18
Reprogramming
integrated remote control 282
Reset button in the instrument
cluster 162
Resetting
All functions (control system) 162
All functions of a submenu 163
Fuel consumption 178
Maintenance service indicator 341
Service indicator (FSS) 342
Trip odometer 151
Residual heat utilization 207, 219
Residual ventilation 219
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 219
Restraint system see Infant and child re-
straint systems 73
Rim 334
Rims and Tires 443
Roadside Assistance
Tele Aid* 269
Roadside assistance 12
Rolling code programming 280
Rolling up the cargo compartment
cover 257
RON 297
RON (Research Octane Number) 463
Rubber parts
Cleaning 350
S
Safety
Occupant 62
Safety belts see Seat belts 44
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 87
Saving current speed 229
SBC 92
SBC brake system 463
Activation 93
Deactivation 94
Driving hints 95
Messages in display 375, 376
Self-check 94
Warning lamp 92
Seat belt force limiter 72
481
Index
Seat belts 69
Cleaning 349
Fastening 44
Proper use of 46, 71
Safety guidelines 66
Warning lamp 357
Seat heater*
Switching off 132
Switching on 132
Seat ventilation*
Switching off 133
Switching on 133
Seating capacity 312
Seats 124
Adjusting 38
Drive-dynamic seat* with multicontour
features 130
Easy entry/exit feature* 124
Heater* 132
Split rear bench seat* 247
Ventilation 133
Selecting display 166, 167
Selector lever
Lock 47, 183
Message in the display 368
Position (automatic
transmission) 183
Self-test
Occupant Classification System 81
Tele Aid* 270
Service
Batteries 424
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator 341
Service and warranty information 10
Service life (tires) 308
Service memory
Messages in display 397
Setting
Convenience functions 164, 175
Cruise control 229
Daytime running lamp mode 170
Distronic* time interval 239
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 140
Higher speed in cruise control 231
Higher speed in Distronic* 237
Hours (clock) 168
Individual vehicle settings 162
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 173
Lamps and lighting (control
system) 170
Language, multifunction display 166
Locator lighting 171
Lower speed in cruise control 231
Lower speed in Distronic* 238
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 165
Minutes (clock) 168, 169
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 176
Slower speed in cruise control 231
Slower speed in Distronic* 238
SmartKey dependent memory 176
Speed in cruise control 231
Speed in Distronic* 237
Speedometer display mode 165
Suspension tuning 244
Temperature (interior) 201, 214
Temperature indicator 165
Tire inflation pressure 167
Units
Speedometer 165
Temperature 165
Tire inflation pressure 167
Vehicle level control 245
482
Index
Settings
Calling up Distronic* 160, 235
Convenience functions 175
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 110
Factory, SmartKey 104
Individual 176
Lighting (control system) 170
Menus and submenus 155
Resetting all (control system) 162
Resetting in the submenu 163
Selective 104, 111
Settings menu
Functions in 162
Individual vehicle settings 162
Submenus 163
Shift lock 463
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 187
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 185
Side impact airbags 68
Side marker lamps 411, 415
Side windows
Automatic opening 222
Cleaning 348
Closing 221, 222
Opening 221
Opening fully (Express-open) 222
Stopping 223
Synchronizing power windows 223
Sidewall 334
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 53
Single wipe 53
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Emergency operations 407
SmartKey 102
Battery check lamp 104, 111
Checking the batteries 106
Factory setting 104
Global locking 104
Global unlocking 104
Locking and unlocking 102
Loss of 106
positions in starter switch 34
Remote controls 102, 107
Restoring to factory setting 105
Selective setting 104, 111
Starting the engine 47
Turning off the engine 57
Unlocking with 32
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 107
Checking the batteries 112
Global locking and unlocking 110
Loss of 114
Messages in display 384
Remote control 107
Restoring to factory setting 111
Turning off the engine 59
Unlocking with 33
SmartKey-dependency memory
Settings 176
Snow chains 338
Spare fuses 434
Spare wheel 402
Speed
Saving current 229
Speed settings
Cruise control 231
Distronic* 237, 238
Speedometer
Displays 234
Settings units 165
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 165
Split rear bench seat* 247
Sporty driving style 244
483
Index
SRS 464
SRS indicator lamp 25, 359
Standing lamps 141
Standing water 292
Starter switch 34
Positions 34
Starting difficulties 49
Starting position 34
Starting the engine 47
Steering column
Height adjustment 41
Length adjustment 41
Steering wheel
Adjusting 40
Cleaning 350
Electrical adjustment 41
Stolen vehicle
Recovery services 277
Stopping
Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 227
Windows 223
Storage box in cargo compartment 255
Storage compartment with cup holder in
the center armrest 263
Storage compartments 259
Glove box 259
Storage space under center armrest (Vehi-
cles with cup holder in the center
console) 260
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions in memory 139
Storing tires 309
Submenus
Convenience 175
For settings 155
In control system 157
Instrument cluster 165, 167
Lighting 170
Resetting functions in Control
system 163
Selecting 163
Settings menu 163
Vehicle 174
Sun visors 193
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 464
Suspension tuning
For comfortable driving style 244
For sporty driving style 244
Switching off
Automatic central locking (control
system) 174
Engine 57
ESP 91
Hazard warning flasher 146
Headlamps 57
Seat heating* 132
Switching on
Automatic central locking (control
system) 174
ESP 92
Hazard warning flasher 146
Headlamps 51
Parking lamps 141
Seat heating* 132
Windshield wipers 52
Symbol (Distronic*)
Distance warning function* 160
Synchronizing
ESP 367
Power tilt /sliding sunroof* 227
Power windows 223
Synchronizing the time 168
T
Tachometer 152
Displaying gear range 186
Overspeed range 152
Tail lamps 411, 415
484
Index
Tailgate
Message in display 399
Opening 115
opening with KEYLESS-GO* 112
Opening with SmartKey 106
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 112
Unlocking with SmartKey 106
Tar stains 346
Tele Aid
Messages in display 397, 398
Tele Aid System 464
Tele Aid* 269
Emergency calls 271
Information 274
Initiating an emergency call
manually 272
Remote door unlock 276
Roadside Assistance 273
Stolen Vehicle Recovery
services 277
System self-check 270
Tele Aid System 270
Upgrade scenario 275
Telematics* 464
Telephone* 26, 268
Answering a call 180
Dialing a number from the phone
book 181
Ending a call 181
Loading phone book* 181
Messages in display 399
Messages in the display 399
Operating 179
Redialing 181
Telescoping rod 254
Temperature
Display mode 165
Setting interior temperature 201
Setting units in display 165
Tires 317
The coolant level is correct if the
level 304
Tightening torque 422, 464
Time
Setting hours 168
Setting minutes 168, 169
TIN 334
Tire
Vehicle maximum load on 335
Tire and Loading Information 311
Tire and loading terminology 332
Tire care and maintenance 308
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 316
Setting units 167
Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
the fuel filler flap
Tire inspection 308
Tire load rating 334
Tire ply composition and material
used 334
Tire speed rating 325, 335
Tire terminology 332
Tire traction 290
Tires
Direction of rotation 310
Driving instructions 288
Messages in display 390, 391, 392
Retreads 307
Rotating 335
Service life 308
Temperature 317, 331
Tire pressure monitor warning
lamp* 358
Tread depth 309, 337
Wear pattern 336
Winter 337
485
Index
Tires and wheels
Tire inflation pressure 318
Tools 403
Tow-away alarm 99
Arming 99
Disarming 99
Disarming for transport 99
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)
Installing 433
Towing the vehicle 430
Traction 189, 335
Transmission fluid level 303
Tread 335
Tread depth 309
Tread depth (tires 337
Treadwear indicators 335
Trip computer 178
Trip odometer
Resetting 151
Trunk
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 113
Turn signals 51
Additional in mirrors 411
Front bulbs 411
Turning off
Engine 57
Twin roller blind 256
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 335
Units
Setting speedometer units 165
Setting temperature units 165
Setting tire inflation pressure
units 167
Unlocking 32, 102, 404
Driver’s door in an emergency 404
Fuel filler flap 296
Global 104
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 110
Selective setting 104, 111
Vehicle in an emergency 276
With KEYLESS-GO* 33
With the SmartKey 32
Upgrade scenario
Tele Aid* 275
Uphill driving
Cruise control 229
Upshifting 185
Useful features 259
Ashtrays 265
Cigarette lighter 266
Garage door opener 277
Heated steering wheel* 267
Tele Aid* 269
Telephone* 268
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 162, 164
Locking in an emergency 405
Lowering 422
Towing 430
Unlocking in an emergency 404
Vehicle capacity weight 335
Vehicle care
Cup holder 349
Distronic* system sensor cover 347
Engine cleaning 346
Gear selector lever 349
Hard plastic trim items 349
Leather upholstery 350
Light alloy wheels 348
Ornamental moldings 347
Paintwork 346
Plastic and rubber parts 350
Power washer 345
Seat belts 349
Steering wheel 349
486
Index
Tar stains 346
Vehicle washing 346
Window cleaning 348
Wood trims 350
Vehicle level
Changing 246
Setting 246
Automatic 246
Manual 246
Vehicle level control system*
Airmatic DC* 244
Vehicle loading terminology 332
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 335
Vehicle status message memory
Calling up 161
Vehicle tool kit 403
Alignment bolt 403
Fuse extractor 403
Hex-socket wrench 403
Open-end wrench 403
Screwdriver 403
Spare fuses 403
Towing eye bolt 403
Universal pliers 403
Wheel wrench 403
Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare
wheel 401
Vehicle washing 346
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 464
Voice control system* 464
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 240
Distronic* 234
Drivers seat belts 69
Parking brake 50
Warranty coverage 439
Washing the vehicle 344
Wear pattern (tires) 336
Weights 449
Wheel change 419
Tightening torque 422
Wheels
Tires and wheels 307
Window curtain airbags 68
Windshield
Defogging 202, 203, 215
Refilling washer fluid 306
Replacing wiper blades 417
Washer fluid 306
Windshield washer fluid
Message in display 399
Refilling 306
Wiping with 53
Windshield wipers 52
Fast wiper speed 52
Intermittent wiping 52
Replacing wiper blades 416, 417
Single wipe 53
Switching on 52
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 53
Winter driving
Block heater* 338
Snow chains 338
Tires 337
Winter tires 337
Winter driving instructions 291
Winter tires 337
Wiper blades 347
Installing 417
Removing 417
Replacing 417
487
Index
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 53
Interval 52
With windshield washer fluid 53
Wiping with window washer fluid 54
Wood trims
Cleaning 350
X
Xenon headlamps*
Bi-Xenon* 459
488
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2508-31
Press time July 20, 2004
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Sommer\ Co rporate\ Media\ AG
Operator’s Manual
E-Class Wagon
Order No. 6515 1130 13 Part No. 211 584 66 96 USA Edition B, 2005
Ê5/tbÁ3Ë
2115846696
Operator’s Manual E-Class Wagon

Navigation menu